Conventions...........................................................................................................................................................7

Product statements..............................................................................................................................................7

Learning about the printer......................................................................... 10

Finding information about the printer...........................................................................................................10

Selecting a location for the printer................................................................................................................. 11

Printer conﬁgurations........................................................................................................................................12

Attaching cables................................................................................................................................................. 14

Finding the printer serial number...................................................................................................................15

Using the control panel.............................................................................. 17

Lexmark CX421, MC2325, and MC2425 MFPs.......................................................................................17

Lexmark CX522, CX622, MC2535, MC2640, and XC2235 MFPs................................................... 18

Lexmark CX625 and XC4240 MFPs...........................................................................................................19

Understanding the status of the power button and indicator light.......................................................19

Setting up and using the home screen applications..............................21

Using the home screen.....................................................................................................................................21

Customizing the home screen.......................................................................................................................22

Supported applications....................................................................................................................................22

Setting up Card Copy.......................................................................................................................................22

Creating a shortcut........................................................................................................................................... 23

Using Display Customization..........................................................................................................................23

Setting up Scan Center....................................................................................................................................24

Setting up Device Quotas............................................................................................................................... 24

Using QR Code Generator..............................................................................................................................25

Conﬁguring Eco‑Settings................................................................................................................................ 25

Using Customer Support.................................................................................................................................25

Creating a Cloud Connector proﬁle............................................................................................................. 26

Managing bookmarks...................................................................................................................................... 26

Creating bookmarks ................................................................................................................................................... 26

Creating folders ........................................................................................................................................................... 27

Managing contacts............................................................................................................................................27

Adding contacts........................................................................................................................................................... 27

Contents 2

Adding groups.............................................................................................................................................................. 28

Editing contacts or groups........................................................................................................................................ 28

Deleting contacts or groups..................................................................................................................................... 28

Setting up and using the accessibility features..................................... 29

Enabling Magniﬁcation mode........................................................................................................................ 29

Activating Voice Guidance..............................................................................................................................29

Adjusting the Voice Guidance speech rate................................................................................................29

Navigating the screen using gestures.........................................................................................................29

Using the keyboard on the display...............................................................................................................30

Enabling spoken passwords or personal identiﬁcation numbers........................................................ 30

Loading paper and specialty media..........................................................31

Setting the paper size and type..................................................................................................................... 31

Conﬁguring Universal paper settings........................................................................................................... 31

Loading trays....................................................................................................................................................... 31

Loading the multipurpose feeder..................................................................................................................33

Loading the manual feeder.............................................................................................................................34

Linking trays........................................................................................................................................................36

Paper support..............................................................................................37

Supported paper sizes..................................................................................................................................... 37

Supported paper types....................................................................................................................................39

Supported paper weights............................................................................................................................... 40

Printing.........................................................................................................42

Printing from a computer.................................................................................................................................42

Printing from a mobile device........................................................................................................................ 42

Printing from a ﬂash drive................................................................................................................................43

Supported ﬂash drives and ﬁle types...........................................................................................................44

Conﬁguring conﬁdential jobs......................................................................................................................... 45

Printing conﬁdential and other held jobs....................................................................................................45

Printing from a Cloud Connector proﬁle......................................................................................................47

Printing a font sample list................................................................................................................................ 47

Printing a directory list......................................................................................................................................47

Copying........................................................................................................48

Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass.................................................................... 48

Contents 3

Making a copy....................................................................................................................................................48

Copying photos..................................................................................................................................................48

Copying on letterhead..................................................................................................................................... 49

Copying on both sides of the paper.............................................................................................................49

Reducing or enlarging copies........................................................................................................................ 49

Collating copies................................................................................................................................................. 49

Placing separator sheets between copies................................................................................................. 50

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet............................................................................................. 50

Creating a copy shortcut.................................................................................................................................50

E-mailing.......................................................................................................51

Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass..................................................................... 51

Conﬁguring the e‑mail SMTP settings.......................................................................................................... 51

Sending an e-mail............................................................................................................................................. 59

Creating an e-mail shortcut............................................................................................................................ 60

Faxing........................................................................................................... 61

Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass..................................................................... 61

Setting up the printer to fax.............................................................................................................................61

Sending a fax......................................................................................................................................................70

Scheduling a fax..................................................................................................................................................71

Creating a fax destination shortcut................................................................................................................71

Changing the fax resolution............................................................................................................................72

Adjusting the fax darkness..............................................................................................................................72

Printing a fax log................................................................................................................................................ 72

Blocking junk faxes........................................................................................................................................... 73

Holding faxes...................................................................................................................................................... 73

Forwarding a fax................................................................................................................................................ 73

Scanning...................................................................................................... 74

Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass.....................................................................74

Scanning to a computer...................................................................................................................................74

Scanning to an FTP server..............................................................................................................................75

Scanning to a network folder using a shortcut..........................................................................................76

Creating an FTP shortcut.................................................................................................................................76

Scanning to a ﬂash drive..................................................................................................................................77

Scanning to a Cloud Connector proﬁle....................................................................................................... 78

Contents 4

Understanding the printer menus............................................................ 79

Menu map............................................................................................................................................................79

Device.................................................................................................................................................................. 80

Print.......................................................................................................................................................................95

Paper................................................................................................................................................................... 104

Copy....................................................................................................................................................................106

Fax........................................................................................................................................................................ 110

E-mail...................................................................................................................................................................123

FTP.......................................................................................................................................................................130

USB Drive...........................................................................................................................................................135

Network/Ports...................................................................................................................................................140

Security...............................................................................................................................................................153

Reports............................................................................................................................................................... 160

Help..................................................................................................................................................................... 162

Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................... 162

Printing the Menu Settings Page................................................................................................................. 162

Securing the printer..................................................................................163

Locating the security slot...............................................................................................................................163

Erasing printer memory..................................................................................................................................163

Erasing printer hard disk memory............................................................................................................... 164

Encrypting the printer hard disk...................................................................................................................164

Restoring factory default settings................................................................................................................164

Statement of Volatility.....................................................................................................................................164

Maintaining the printer............................................................................ 166

Conﬁguring supply notiﬁcations.................................................................................................................. 166

Setting up e‑mail alerts.................................................................................................................................. 166

Viewing reports................................................................................................................................................166

Adjusting the speaker volume......................................................................................................................167

Networking........................................................................................................................................................ 168

Cleaning printer parts..................................................................................................................................... 172

Ordering parts and supplies..........................................................................................................................176

Replacing parts and supplies....................................................................................................................... 180

Moving the printer........................................................................................................................................... 193

Saving energy and paper.............................................................................................................................. 194

Contents 5

Recycling............................................................................................................................................................195

Clearing jams.............................................................................................196

Avoiding jams................................................................................................................................................... 196

Identifying jam locations................................................................................................................................ 197

Paper jam in trays............................................................................................................................................ 198

Paper jam in door A.........................................................................................................................................198

Paper jam in door C....................................................................................................................................... 204

Paper jam in the standard bin..................................................................................................................... 204

Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder.......................................................................................................208

Paper jam in the manual feeder..................................................................................................................209

Troubleshooting........................................................................................ 210

Print quality problems.....................................................................................................................................210

Printing problems..............................................................................................................................................211

The printer is not responding...................................................................................................................... 235

Unable to read ﬂash drive............................................................................................................................ 236

Enabling the USB port................................................................................................................................... 236

Network connection problems.................................................................................................................... 237

Hardware options problems........................................................................................................................ 239

Issues with supplies........................................................................................................................................ 241

Paper feed problems..................................................................................................................................... 242

Color quality problems.................................................................................................................................. 246

E-mailing problems.........................................................................................................................................249

Faxing problems............................................................................................................................................. 250

Scanning problems........................................................................................................................................ 255

Contacting customer support.......................................................................................................................261

Upgrading and migrating........................................................................262

Hardware.......................................................................................................................................................... 262

Software............................................................................................................................................................ 272

Firmware............................................................................................................................................................274

Notices....................................................................................................... 276

Index...........................................................................................................293

Contents 6

Safety information

Conventions

Note: A note identiﬁes information that could help you.

Warning: A warning identiﬁes something that could damage the product hardware or software.

CAUTION: A caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could injure you.

Dierent types of caution statements include:

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Indicates a risk of injury.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Indicates a risk of electrical shock.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: Indicates a risk of burn if touched.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Indicates a crush hazard.

CAUTION—PINCH HAZARD: Indicates a risk of being caught between moving parts.

Product statements

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord to

an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, use only the power cord

provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,

multioutlet extenders, or UPS devices. The power capacity of these types of accessories can be easily

overloaded by a laser printer and may result in a risk of ﬁre, property damage, or poor printer

performance.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Only a Lexmark Inline Surge Protector that is properly connected

between the printer and the power cord provided with the printer may be used with this product. The

use of non-Lexmark surge protection devices may result in a risk of ﬁre, property damage, or poor

printer performance.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of ﬁre, use only a 26 AWG or larger

telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone

network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media

Authority.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not place or use this product near

water or wet locations.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make

any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a

lightning storm.

Safety information 7

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power

cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects

such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of ﬁre or electrical shock results. Inspect

the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet

before inspecting it.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, make sure that all external

connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked

plug-in ports.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller

board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn

the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any

other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the

printer.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a

lightning storm.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the

printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before

proceeding.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may require

two or more people to lift it safely.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: When moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal

injury or printer damage:

•Make sure that all doors and trays are closed.

•Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.

•If the printer has separate ﬂoor-standing optional trays or output options attached to it, then disconnect

them before moving the printer.

•If the printer has a caster base, then carefully roll it to the new location. Use caution when passing over

thresholds and breaks in ﬂooring.

•If the printer does not have a caster base but is conﬁgured with optional trays or output options, then remove

the output options and lift the printer o the trays. Do not try to lift the printer and any options at the same

time.

•Always use the handholds on the printer to lift it.

•Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.

•Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the

options.

•Keep the printer in an upright position.

•Avoid severe jarring movements.

•Make sure that your ﬁngers are not under the printer when you set it down.

•Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the printer.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a

caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information

on supported conﬁgurations, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

Safety information 8

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.

Keep all other trays closed until needed.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot

component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

CAUTION—PINCH HAZARD: To avoid the risk of a pinch injury, use caution in areas marked with this

label. Pinch injuries may occur around moving parts, such as gears, doors, trays, and covers.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or

performance of procedures other than those speciﬁed in the User’s Guide may result in hazardous

radiation exposure.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced.

There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble,

or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions

and local regulations.

This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of speciﬁc

manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer

is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.

Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.

This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release

emissions. You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for

selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.

This product may produce small amounts of ozone during normal operation, and may be equipped with a ﬁlter

designed to limit ozone concentrations to levels well below the recommended exposure limits. To avoid high

ozone concentration levels during extensive usage, install this product in a well-ventilated area and replace

the ozone and exhaust ﬁlters if instructed to do so in the product maintenance instructions. If there are no

references to ﬁlters in the product maintenance instructions, then there are no ﬁlters requiring replacement for

this product.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Safety information 9

Learning about the printer

Finding information about the printer

What are you looking for? Find it here

Initial setup instructions See the setup documentation that came with the

printer.

•Printer software

•Print or fax driver

•Printer ﬁrmware

•Utility

Go to www.lexmark.com/downloads, search for

your printer model, and then in the Type menu,

select the driver, ﬁrmware, or utility that you need.

•Selecting and storing paper and specialty media

•Loading paper

•Conﬁguring printer settings

•Viewing and printing documents and photos

•Conﬁguring the printer on a network

•Caring for and maintaining the printer

•Troubleshooting and solving problems

Information Center—Go to

https://infoserve.lexmark.com.

How‑to videos—Go to

https://infoserve.lexmark.com/idv/.

Help Menu Pages—Access the guides on the

printer ﬁrmware, or go to

http://support.lexmark.com.

Touch Screen Guide—Go to

http://support.lexmark.com.

Setting up and conﬁguring the accessibility features of your

printer

Lexmark Accessibility Guide—Go to

http://support.lexmark.com.

Help information for using the printer software Help for Microsoft Windows or Macintosh operating

systems—Open a printer software program or

application, and then click Help.

Click

to view context‑sensitive information.

Notes:

•Help is automatically installed with the printer

software.

•Depending on the operating system, the

printer software is either in the printer

program folder or on the desktop.

Learning about the printer 10

What are you looking for? Find it here

•Documentation

•Live chat support

•E‑mail support

•Voice support

Go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Note: Select your country or region, and then

select your product to view the appropriate

support site.

Support contact information for your country or

region can be found on the website or on the

printed warranty that came with the printer.

Have the following information ready when you

contact customer support:

•Place and date of purchase

•Machine type and serial number

For more information, see “Finding the printer

serial number” on page 15.

•Safety information

•Regulatory information

•Warranty information

•Environmental information

Warranty information varies by country or region:

•In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited

Warranty included with the printer, or go to

http://support.lexmark.com.

•In other countries and regions—See the

printed warranty that came with the printer.

Product Information Guide—See the

documentation that came with the printer or go to

http://support.lexmark.com.

Selecting a location for the printer

•Leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors and to install hardware options.

•Set up the printer near an electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not place or use this product

near water or wet locations.

•Make sure that airﬂow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical

Committee 156 standard.

•Provide a ﬂat, sturdy, and stable surface.

•Keep the printer:

–Clean, dry, and free of dust

–Away from stray staples and paper clips

–Away from the direct airﬂow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators

–Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes

•Observe the temperature range.

Operating temperature 10 to 32.2°C (50 to 90°F)

•Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:

Learning about the printer 11

1Top 305 mm (12 in. )

2Rear 102 mm (4 in.)

3Right side 76 mm (3 in.)

4Front 508 mm (20 in.)

Note: The minimum space needed in front of the machine is 76 mm (3 in.).

5Left side 76 mm (3 in.)

Printer conﬁgurations

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a

caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information

on supported conﬁgurations, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.

Keep all other trays closed until needed.

Depending on your printer model, you can conﬁgure your printer by adding an optional 650‑sheet duo tray or

both the 650‑sheet duo tray and 550‑sheet tray. For more information, see “Installing optional trays” on

page 271.

Learning about the printer 12

1Automatic document feeder (ADF)

2ADF tray

3Standard bin

4ADF bin

5Standard 250‑sheet tray

6Optional 650‑sheet duo tray

Note: This tray is available only in some printer models.

7Optional 550‑sheet tray

Note: This tray is available only in some printer models.

8Manual feeder

9Control panel

Note: The appearance may vary depending on your printer model.

Learning about the printer 13

Attaching cables

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make

any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a

lightning storm.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord to

an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, use only the power cord

provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of ﬁre, use only a 26 AWG or larger

telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone

network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media

Authority.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch the USB cable, any

wireless network adapter, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing.

Use the To

1LINE port

Note: Available only in some

printer models.

Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall

jack (RJ‑11), DSL ﬁlter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows

you to access the telephone line to send and receive faxes.

2EXT port

Note: Available only in some

printer models.

Connect more devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer

and the telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax

line for the printer and if this connection method is supported in your

country or region.

3Power cord socket Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Learning about the printer 14

Use the To

4USB port

Note: Available only in some

printer models.

Attach a keyboard or any compatible option.

5USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer.

6Ethernet port Connect the printer to a network.

Finding the printer serial number

1Open door A.

Learning about the printer 15

2Locate the serial number at the left side of the printer.

Learning about the printer 16

Using the control panel

Lexmark CX421, MC2325, and MC2425 MFPs

Use the To

1Display View printing options, printer status, and error messages.

2Select button •Select a menu option.

•Save the changes in a setting.

3Arrow buttons •Scroll through the menus or move between screens and menu options.

•Adjust the numeric value of a setting.

4Address book button View the stored addresses.

5Redial button View the last number dialed.

6Numeric keypad Enter numbers or symbols in an input ﬁeld.

7Power button •Turn on or turn o the printer.

Note: To turn o the printer, press and hold the power button for ﬁve seconds.

•Set the printer to Sleep or Hibernate mode.

•Wake the printer from Sleep or Hibernate mode.

8Stop or Cancel button Stop the current printer task.

9Start button Start a printer task, depending on which mode is selected.

10 Pause button Place a dial pause in a fax number.

11 Backspace button Move the cursor backward and delete a character in an input ﬁeld.

12 Fax button Send faxes.

13 Indicator light Check the printer status.

14 Back button Return to the previous screen.

15 Home button Go to the home screen.

Using the control panel 17

Lexmark CX522, CX622, MC2535, MC2640, and XC2235

MFPs

Use the To

1Display •View the printer messages and supply status.

•Set up and operate the printer.

2Home button Go to the home screen.

3Numeric keypad Enter numbers or symbols in an input ﬁeld.

4Power button •Turn on or turn o the printer.

Note: To t urn o the printer, press and hold the power button for ﬁve

seconds.

•Set the printer to Sleep or Hibernate mode.

•Wake the printer from Sleep or Hibernate mode.

5Clear all or Reset button Reset the default settings of a function such as copying, faxing, or scanning.

6Stop or Cancel button Stop the current printer task.

7Start button Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.

8Pause button Place a dial pause in a fax number.

9Backspace button Move the cursor backward and delete a character in an input ﬁeld.

10 Indicator light Check the printer status.

11 Volume buttons Adjust the speaker volume.

Using the control panel 18

Lexmark CX625 and XC4240 MFPs

Use the To

1Display •View the printer messages and supply status.

•Set up and operate the printer.

2Home button Go to the home screen.

3Power button •Turn on or turn o the printer.

Note: To turn o the printer, press and hold the power button for ﬁve

seconds.

•Set the printer to Sleep or Hibernate mode.

•Wake the printer from Sleep or Hibernate mode.

4Numeric keypad Enter numbers or symbols in an input ﬁeld.

5Pause button Place a dial pause in a fax number.

6Start button Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.

7Clear all or Reset button Reset the default settings of a function such as copying, faxing, or scanning.

8Stop or Cancel button Stop the current printer task.

9Backspace button Move the cursor backward and delete a character in an input ﬁeld.

10 Indicator light Check the status of the printer.

11 Volume buttons Adjust the speaker volume.

12 Speaker port Attach a speaker.

Understanding the status of the power button and

indicator light

Indicator light Printer status

O The printer is o or in Hibernate mode.

Blue The printer is ready or processing data.

Using the control panel 19

Indicator light Printer status

Red The printer requires user intervention.

Power button light Printer status

O The printer is o, ready, or processing data.

Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.

Blinking amber The printer is in Hibernate mode.

Using the control panel 20

Setting up and using the home screen

applications

Note: These applications are supported only in some printer models.

Using the home screen

Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative

setup, and active embedded solutions.

Tou ch To

1Copy Make copies.

2E‑mail Send e‑mails.

3Settings Access the printer menus.

4Fax Send fax.

5Address Book Manage a contact list that other applications on the printer can access.

6Status/Supplies •Show a printer warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention

to continue processing.

•View more information on the printer warning or message, and on how to clear it.

Note: You can also access this setting by touching the top section of the home

screen.

7USB Drive •Print photos and documents from a ﬂash drive.

•Scan photos and documents to a ﬂash drive

8Job Queue Show all the current print jobs.

Note: You can also access this setting by touching the top section of the home

screen.

9Held Jobs Show the print jobs that are held in the printer memory.

10 Shortcut Center Organize all shortcuts.

11 App Proﬁles Access application proﬁles.

12 Scan Proﬁles Scan and save documents directly to the computer.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 21

Tou ch To

13 FTP Scan and save documents directly to an FTP server.

14 Bookmarks Organize all bookmarks.

15 Change Language Change the language on the display.

Customizing the home screen

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Settings > Device > Visible Home Screen Icons.

3Select the icons that you want to appear on the home screen.

4Apply the changes.

Supported applications

Application Printer models

Scan Center CX522, CX622, CX625, MC2535, MC2640, XC2235, XC4240

Shortcut Center CX522, CX622, CX625, MC2535, MC2640, XC2235, XC4240

Card Copy CX522, CX622, CX625, MC2535, MC2640, XC2235, XC4240

Display Customization CX522, CX622, CX625, MC2535, MC2640, XC2235, XC4240

Cloud Connector MC2535, MC2640, XC2235, XC4240

Customer Support XC2235, XC4240

Device Quotas XC2235, XC4240

QR Code XC2235, XC4240

Eco‑Settings XC2235, XC4240

Setting up Card Copy

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Apps > Card Copy > Conﬁgure.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 22

Notes:

•Make sure that Display Icon is enabled.

•Make sure that E‑mail Settings and Network Share Settings are conﬁgured.

•When scanning a card, make sure that the scan resolution does not exceed 200 dpi for color and

400 dpi for black and white.

•When scanning multiple cards, make sure that the scan resolution does not exceed 150 dpi for color

and 300 dpi for black and white.

3Apply the changes.

Note: You need a printer hard disk to scan multiple cards.

Creating a shortcut

1From the home screen, touch Shortcut Center.

Note: The icon and name may have been changed. For more information, contact your administrator.

2Select a printer function, and then touch Create Shortcut.

Note: The Secure E‑mail function is not supported.

3Conﬁgure the settings, and then touch Save.

4Type a unique shortcut name.

Note: To avoid clipped names on the home screen, type only up to 25 characters.

5Tou ch OK.

The application automatically generates a unique shortcut number. To launch the shortcut, press # and then

the shortcut number.

Using Display Customization

Before using the application, make sure to do the following:

•From the Embedded Web Server, click Apps > Display Customization > Conﬁgure.

•Enable and conﬁgure the screen saver, slideshow, and wallpaper settings.

Managing screen saver and slide show images

1From the Screen Saver and Slideshow Images section, add, edit, or delete an image.

Notes:

•You can add up to 10 images.

•When enabled, the status icons appear on the screen saver only when there are errors, warnings, or

cloud‑based notiﬁcations.

2Apply the changes.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 23

Changing the wallpaper image

1From the home screen, touch Change Wallpaper.

2Select an image to use.

3Apply the changes.

Running a slide show from a ﬂash drive

1Insert a ﬂash drive into the USB port.

2From the home screen, touch Slideshow.

Images appear in alphabetical order.

Note: You ca n r e m o v e t he ﬂash drive after the slide show starts, but the images are not stored in the

printer. If the slide show stops, then insert the ﬂash drive again to view the images.

Setting up Scan Center

1From the home screen, touch Scan Center.

2Select and create a destination, and then conﬁgure the settings.

Notes:

•When creating a network destination, make sure to validate and adjust the settings until no errors

occur.

•Only destinations created from the Embedded Web Server are saved. For more information, see the

documentation that came with the solution.

3Apply the changes.

Setting up Device Quotas

Notes:

•This application is supported only in some printer models. For more information, see “Supported

applications” on page 22.

•You may need administrative rights to access the application.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Apps > Device Quotas > Conﬁgure.

3In the User Accounts section, add or edit a user, and then set the user quota.

4Apply the changes.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 24

Note: For information on how to conﬁgure the application and its security settings, see the Device

Quotas Administrator’s Guide.

Using QR Code Generator

Notes:

•This application is supported only in some printer models. For more information, see “Supported

applications” on page 22.

•You may need administrative rights to access the application.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Apps > QR Code Generator > Conﬁgure.

3Do either of the following:

•Select a default QR code value.

•Type a QR code value.

4Apply the changes.

Conﬁguring Eco‑Settings

Note: This application is supported only in some printer models. For more information, see “Supported

applications” on page 22.

1From the home screen, touch Eco‑Settings.

2Conﬁgure the Eco‑Mode settings or schedule a power-saving mode.

Using Customer Support

Note: This application is supported only in some printer models. For more information, see “Supported

applications” on page 22.

1From the home screen, touch Customer Support.

2Print or e‑mail the information.

Note: For information on conﬁguring the application settings, see the Customer Support Administrator’s

Guide.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 25

Creating a Cloud Connector proﬁle

We recommend logging in to the printer before you create a proﬁle. To enable a login method, see the

Embedded Web Server

‑

Security Admin Guide.

1From the home screen, touch Cloud Connector.

2Select a cloud service provider.

3Tou ch Create a Proﬁle or .

4Type a unique proﬁle name.

5If necessary, enter a PIN.

Note: When using the printer as guest, protect the proﬁle with a PIN.

6Tou ch Create, and then take note of the authorization code.

Note: The authorization code is valid only for 24 hours.

7Open a web browser, and then go to https://lexmark.cloud-connect.co.

8Click Next, and then accept the Terms of Use.

9Enter the authorization code, and then click Connect.

10 Log in to your cloud service provider account.

11 Grant permissions.

Note: To complete the authorization process, open the proﬁle within 72 hours.

Managing bookmarks

Creating bookmarks

Use bookmarks to print frequently accessed documents that are stored in servers or on the web.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Bookmark Setup > Add Bookmark, and then type a unique name for the bookmark.

3Select an Address protocol type, and then do one of the following:

•For HTTP and HTTPS, type the URL that you want to bookmark.

•For HTTPS, make sure to use the host name instead of the IP address. For example, type

myWebsite.com/sample.pdf instead of typing 123.123.123.123/sample.pdf. Make sure that

the host name also matches the Common Name (CN) value in the server certiﬁcate. For more information

on obtaining the CN value in the server certiﬁcate, see the help information for your web browser.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 26

•For FTP, type the FTP address. For example, myServer/myDirectory. Enter the FTP port. Port 21 is

the default port for sending commands.

•For SMB, type the network folder address. For example, myServer/myShare/myFile.pdf. Type the

network domain name.

•If necessary, select the Authentication type for FTP and SMB.

To limit access to the bookmark, enter a PIN.

Note: The application supports the following ﬁle types: PDF, JPEG, TIFF, and HTML-based web pages.

Other ﬁle types such as DOCX and XLXS are supported in some printer models.

4Click Save.

Note: To manage bookmarks, click Bookmark Setup.

Creating folders

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Bookmark Setup > Add Folder, and then type a unique name for the folder.

Note: To limit access to the folder, enter a PIN.

3Click Save.

Notes:

•You can create folders or bookmarks inside a folder. To create a bookmark, see “Creating bookmarks”

on page 26.

•To manage folders, click Bookmark Setup.

Managing contacts

Adding contacts

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Address Book.

3From the Contacts section, add a contact.

Note: You can assign the contact to one or more groups.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 27

4If necessary, specify a login method to allow application access.

5Apply the changes.

Adding groups

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Address Book.

3From the Contact Groups section, add a group name.

Note: You can assign one or more contacts to the group.

4Apply the changes.

Editing contacts or groups

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Address Book.

3Do either of the following:

•From the Contacts section, click a contact name, and then edit the information.

•From the Contact Groups section, click a group name, and then edit the information.

4Apply the changes.

Deleting contacts or groups

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Address Book.

3Do either of the following:

•From the Contacts section, select a contact that you want to delete.

•From the Contact Groups section, select a group name that you want to delete.

Setting up and using the home screen applications 28

Setting up and using the accessibility features

Notes:

•These features are supported only in some printer models.

•For more information on the accessibility features of your printer model, see the Accessibility Guide at

http://support.lexmark.com.

Enabling Magniﬁcation mode

1From the control panel, press and hold the 5 key until you hear a voice message.

2Select Magniﬁcation mode.

3Select OK.

For more information on navigating a magniﬁed screen, see “Navigating the screen using gestures” on

page 29.

Activating Voice Guidance

From the control panel

1Press and hold the 5 key until you hear a voice message.

2Select OK.

From the keyboard

1Press and hold the 5 key until you hear a voice message.

2Press Tab to navigate the focus cursor to the OK button, and then press Enter.

Notes:

•Voice Guidance is also activated when you insert headphones into the headphone jack.

•To adjust the volume, use the volume buttons at the bottom part of the control panel.

Adjusting the Voice Guidance speech rate

1From the home screen, select Settings > Device > Accessibility > Speech Rate.

2Select the speech rate.

Navigating the screen using gestures

Notes:

•The gestures are applicable only when Voice Guidance is activated.

Setting up and using the accessibility features 29

•Enable Magniﬁcation to use the zoom and pan gestures.

•Use a physical keyboard to type characters and adjust certain settings.

Gesture Function

Double‑tap Select an option or item on the screen.

Triple‑tap Zoom in or zoom out text and images.

Swipe right or swipe down Move to the next item on the screen.

Swipe left or swipe up Move to the previous item on the screen.

Pan Access parts of the zoomed image that are beyond the limits of the screen.

Note: This gesture requires the use of two ﬁngers to drag across a zoomed

image.

Swipe up then left Exit an application and return to the home screen.

Swipe down then left •Cancel a job.

•Go back to the previous setting.

•Exit the screen that appears without changing any setting or value.

Swipe up then down Repeat a spoken prompt.

Using the keyboard on the display

Do one or more of the following:

•Drag a ﬁnger over the key to announce the character.

•Lift the ﬁnger to enter or type the character in the ﬁeld.

•Select Backspace to delete characters.

•To hear the content in the input ﬁeld, select Tab, and then select Shift + Tab.

Enabling spoken passwords or personal identiﬁcation

numbers

1From the home screen, select Settings > Device > Accessibility > Speak Passwords/PINs.

2Enable the setting.

Setting up and using the accessibility features 30

Loading paper and specialty media

Setting the paper size and type

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type > select a paper source

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Set the paper size and type.

Conﬁguring Universal paper settings

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Media Conﬁguration > Universal Setup

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Conﬁgure the settings.

Loading trays

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.

Keep all other trays closed until needed.

1Remove the tray.

Note: To avoid paper jams, do not remove trays while the printer is busy.

2Adjust the guides to match the size of the paper that you are loading.

Note: Use the indicators on the bottom of the tray to position the guides.

Loading paper and specialty media 31

3Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.

4Load the paper stack with the printable side faceup, and then make sure that the side guides ﬁt snugly

against the paper.

Notes:

•Load letterhead faceup with the header toward the front of the tray for one‑sided printing.

•Load letterhead facedown with the header toward the back of the tray for two‑sided printing.

•Do not slide paper into the tray.

•To avoid paper jams, make sure that the stack height is below the maximum paper ﬁll indicator.

Loading paper and specialty media 32

5Insert the tray.

If necessary, set the paper size and paper type from the control panel to match the paper loaded.

Loading the multipurpose feeder

1Open the multipurpose feeder.

Note: The multipurpose feeder is available only in some printer models.

2Adjust the guide to match the size of the paper that you are loading.

Loading paper and specialty media 33

3Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.

4Load paper with the printable side facedown.

•Load letterhead with the printable side facedown and the top edge entering the printer ﬁrst for one‑sided

printing.

•Load letterhead with the printable side faceup and the top edge entering the printer last for two‑sided

printing.

•Load envelopes with the ﬂap side up and against the right side of the paper guide.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated

linings, or self‑stick adhesives.

5From the control panel, set the paper size and paper type to match the paper loaded.

Loading the manual feeder

1Adjust the edge guides to match the width of the paper that you are loading.

Loading paper and specialty media 34

Note: Make sure that the guides ﬁt snugly against the paper, but not too tight as to cause the paper to

buckle.

2Load a sheet of paper with the printable side facedown.

Note: Make sure that the paper is loaded straight to avoid skewed or crooked print.

•Load letterhead with the printable side facedown and the top edge entering the printer ﬁrst for one‑sided

printing.

•Load letterhead with the printable side faceup and the top edge entering the printer last for two‑sided

printing.

•Load envelope with the ﬂap side up and against the right side of the paper guide.

3Feed the paper until its leading edge gets pulled in.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid paper jams, do not force paper into the manual feeder.

Loading paper and specialty media 35

Linking trays

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Select a paper source.

3Set the same paper size and paper type for the trays that you are linking.

4From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Maintenance > Conﬁg Menu > Tray Conﬁguration

5Set Tray Linking to Automatic.

Note: To unlink trays, make sure that no trays have the same paper size and paper type settings.

Warning—Potential Damage: The temperature of the fuser varies according to the speciﬁed paper type. To

avoid printing issues, match the paper type setting in the printer with the paper loaded in the tray.

Loading paper and specialty media 36

Paper support

Supported paper sizes

Note: Your printer model may have a 650‑sheet duo tray, which consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an

integrated 100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550‑sheet tray of the 650‑sheet duo tray supports the same

paper sizes as the optional 550‑sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports dierent paper

sizes, types, and weights.

Paper size and

dimension

Standard

250‑sheet tray

Manual

feeder

Optional 650‑sheet duo tray Optional

550‑sheet

tray

Two‑sided

printing

550‑sheet

tray

Multipurpose

feeder

210 x 297 mm

(8.27 x 11.7 in.)

A51,2

148 x 210 mm

(5.83 x 8.27 in.)

105 x 148 mm

(4.13 x 5.83 in.)

XXX

JIS B5

182 x 257 mm

(7.17 x 10.1 in.)

Letter

215.9 x 279.4 mm

(8.5 x 11 in.)

Legal

215.9 x 355.6 mm

(8.5 x 14 in.)

Executive

184.2 x 266.7 mm

(7.25 x 10.5 in.)

Oﬁcio (Mexico)

215.9 x 340.4 mm

(8.5 x 13.4 in.)

1 Load this paper size into tray 1 and the manual feeder with the long edge entering the printer ﬁrst.

2 Load this paper size into tray 2, tray 3, and the multipurpose feeder with the short edge entering the printer ﬁrst.

3 When Universal is selected, the page is formatted for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is speciﬁed

by the software application.

4 Load narrow paper with the short edge entering the printer ﬁrst.

5 When Other Envelope is selected, the page is formatted for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is

speciﬁed by the software application.

Paper support 37

Paper size and

dimension

Standard

250‑sheet tray

Manual

feeder

Optional 650‑sheet duo tray Optional

550‑sheet

tray

Two‑sided

printing

550‑sheet

tray

Multipurpose

feeder

Folio

215.9 x 330.2 mm

(8.5 x 13 in.)

Statement

139.7 x 215.9 mm

(5.5 x 8.5 in.)

XXX

Hagaki

100 x 148 mm

(3.94 x 5.83 in.)

XXX

Universal3,4

98.4 x 148 mm to

215.9 x 355.6 mm

(3.87 x 5.83 in. to

8.5 x 14 in.)

XXX

Universal3,4

76.2 x 127 mm to

215.9 x 355.6 mm

(3 x 5 in. to 8.5 x 14 in.)

XXXX

Universal3,4

148 x 210 mm to

215.9 x 355.6 mm

(5.83 x 8.27 in. to

8.5 x 14 in.)

Universal3,4

210 x 250 mm to

215.9 x 355.6 mm

(8.27 x 9.84 in. to

8.5 x 14 in.)

7 3/4 Envelope

98.4 x 190.5 mm

(3.875 x 7.5 in.)

XXX

9 Envelope

98.4 x 225.4 mm

(3.875 x 8.9 in.)

XXX

1 Load this paper size into tray 1 and the manual feeder with the long edge entering the printer ﬁrst.

2 Load this paper size into tray 2, tray 3, and the multipurpose feeder with the short edge entering the printer ﬁrst.

3 When Universal is selected, the page is formatted for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is speciﬁed

by the software application.

4 Load narrow paper with the short edge entering the printer ﬁrst.

5 When Other Envelope is selected, the page is formatted for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is

speciﬁed by the software application.

Paper support 38

Paper size and

dimension

Standard

250‑sheet tray

Manual

feeder

Optional 650‑sheet duo tray Optional

550‑sheet

tray

Two‑sided

printing

550‑sheet

tray

Multipurpose

feeder

10 Envelope

104.8 x 241.3 mm

(4.12 x 9.5 in.)

XXX

DL Envelope

110 x 220 mm

(4.33 x 8.66 in.)

XXX

C5 Envelope

162 x 229 mm

(6.38 x 9.01 in.)

XXX

B5 Envelope

176 x 250 mm

(6.93 x 9.84 in.)

XXX

Monarch

98.425 x 190.5 mm

(3.875 x 7.5 in.)

XXX

Other Envelope5

98.4 x 162 mm to

176 x 250 mm

(3.87 x 6.38 in. to

6.93 x 9.84 in.)

XXX

1 Load this paper size into tray 1 and the manual feeder with the long edge entering the printer ﬁrst.

2 Load this paper size into tray 2, tray 3, and the multipurpose feeder with the short edge entering the printer ﬁrst.

3 When Universal is selected, the page is formatted for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is speciﬁed

by the software application.

4 Load narrow paper with the short edge entering the printer ﬁrst.

5 When Other Envelope is selected, the page is formatted for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is

speciﬁed by the software application.

Supported paper types

Notes:

•Your printer model may have a 650‑sheet duo tray, which consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated

100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550‑sheet tray of the 650‑sheet duo tray supports the same paper

type as the 550‑sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports dierent paper sizes, types,

and weights.

•Labels, envelopes, and card stock always print at 25 pages per minute.

•The ADF supports only plain paper.

Paper support 39

Paper type Standard

250‑sheet

tray

Manual

feeder

Optional 650‑sheet duo tray Optional

550‑sheet

tray

Two‑sided

printing

550‑sheet

tray

Multipurpose

feeder

Plain paper

Card stock X

Envelopes XXX

Paper labels

Vinyl labels X

Supported paper weights

Notes:

•Your printer model may have a 650‑sheet duo tray, which consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated

100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550‑sheet tray of the 650‑sheet duo tray supports the same paper

types as the 550‑sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports dierent paper sizes, types,

and weights.

•Labels, envelopes, and card stock always print at 25 pages per minute.

•The ADF supports 52–120 g/m2 (14–32 lb bond) paper.

Paper type and

weight

Standard

250‑sheet

tray

Manual

feeder

Optional 650‑sheet duo tray Optional

550‑sheet

tray

Two‑sided

printing

550‑sheet

tray

Multipurpose

feeder

Light paper1

60–74.9 g/m2

grain long (16–

19.9‑lb bond)

Plain paper

75–90.3 g/m2

grain long (20–

24‑lb bond)

Heavy paper

90.3–105 g/m2

grain long (24.1–

28‑lb bond)

1 Paper less than 75 g/m2 (20 lb) must be printed with Paper Type set to Light Paper. Failure to do so may cause

excessive curl which can lead to feeding errors, especially in more humid environments.

2 Labels and other specialty media are supported for occasional use and must be tested for acceptability.

3 Paper labels up to 105 g/m2 (28‑lb bond) are supported.

4 100% cotton content maximum weight is 24‑lb bond.

5 28‑lb bond envelopes are limited to 25% cotton content.

Paper support 40

Paper type and

weight

Standard

250‑sheet

tray

Manual

feeder

Optional 650‑sheet duo tray Optional

550‑sheet

tray

Two‑sided

printing

550‑sheet

tray

Multipurpose

feeder

Card stock

105.1–162 g/m2

grain long (28.1–

43‑lb bond)

Card stock

105.1–200 g/m2

grain long (28.1–

53‑lb bond)

XX XX

Paper Labels2

131 g/m2 (35‑lb

bond)

Vinyl Labels2

131 g/m2 (35‑lb

bond)

Envelopes4,5

60–105 g/m2 (16–

28‑lb bond)

XXX

1 Paper less than 75 g/m2 (20 lb) must be printed with Paper Type set to Light Paper. Failure to do so may cause

excessive curl which can lead to feeding errors, especially in more humid environments.

2 Labels and other specialty media are supported for occasional use and must be tested for acceptability.

3 Paper labels up to 105 g/m2 (28‑lb bond) are supported.

4 100% cotton content maximum weight is 24‑lb bond.

5 28‑lb bond envelopes are limited to 25% cotton content.

Paper support 41

Printing

Printing from a computer

Note: For labels, card stock, and envelopes, set the paper size and type in the printer before printing the

document.

1From the document that you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.

2If necessary, adjust the settings.

3Print the document.

Printing from a mobile device

Printing from a mobile device using Lexmark Mobile Print

LexmarkTM Mobile Print allows you to send documents and images directly to a supported Lexmark printer.

1Open the document, and then send or share the document to Lexmark Mobile Print.

Note: Some third‑party applications may not support the send or share feature. For more information, see

the documentation that came with the application.

2Select a printer.

3Print the document.

Printing from a mobile device using Mopria Print Service

Mopria® Print Service is a mobile printing solution for mobile devices running on AndroidTM version 5.0 or later.

It allows you to print directly to any Mopria‑certiﬁed printer.

Note: Make sure that you download the Mopria Print Service application from the Google PlayTM store and

enable it in the mobile device.

1From your Android mobile device, launch a compatible application or select a document from your ﬁle

manager.

2Tap > Print.

3Select a printer, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.

4Tap .

Printing from a mobile device using AirPrint

The AirPrint software feature is a mobile printing solution that allows you to print directly from Apple devices

to an AirPrint‑certiﬁed printer.

Printing 42

Notes:

•Make sure that the Apple device and the printer are connected to the same network. If the network has

multiple wireless hubs, then make sure that both devices are connected to the same subnet.

•This application is supported only in some Apple devices.

1From your mobile device, select a document from your ﬁle manager or launch a compatible application.

2Tap > Print.

3Select a printer, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.

4Print the document.

Printing from a mobile device using Wi‑Fi Direct®

Wi‑Fi Direct® is a printing service that lets you print to any Wi‑Fi Direct‑ready printer.

Note: Make sure that the mobile device is connected to the printer wireless network. For more information,

see “Connecting a mobile device to the printer” on page 170.

1From your mobile device, launch a compatible application or select a document from your ﬁle manager.

2Depending on your mobile device, do one of the following:

•Tap > Print.

3Select a printer, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.

4Print the document.

Printing from a ﬂash drive

1Insert the ﬂash drive.

Printing 43

Notes:

•If you insert the ﬂash drive when an error message appears, then the printer ignores the ﬂash drive.

•If you insert the ﬂash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the

display.

2Select the document that you want to print.

If necessary, conﬁgure other print settings.

3Print the document.

To print another document, select USB Drive.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch the ﬂash drive or

the printer in the area shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device.

Supported ﬂash drives and ﬁle types

Flash drives

•Lexar JumpDrive S70 (16GB and 32GB)

•SanDisk Cruzer (16GB and 32GB)

•PNY Attache (16GB and 32GB)

Notes:

–The printer supports high‑speed USB ﬂash drives with full‑speed standard.

–USB ﬂash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system.

File types

Documents

•PDF (version 1.7 or earlier)

•XPS

•Microsoft ﬁle formats (.doc, .docx, .xls, .xlsx, .ppt, .pptx) are supported only in some printer models.

Printing 44

Images

•.dcx

•.gif

•.JPEG or .jpg

•.bmp

•.pcx

•.TIFF or .tif

•.webp

Conﬁguring conﬁdential jobs

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Security > Conﬁdential Print Setup

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Conﬁgure the settings.

Use To

Max Invalid PIN Set the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.

Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name are deleted.

Conﬁdential Job

Expiration

Set the expiration time for conﬁdential print jobs.

Note: Conﬁdential held jobs are stored in the printer until they are released or

deleted manually.

Repeat Job Expiration Set the expiration time for a repeat print job.

Note: Repeat held jobs are stored in the printer memory for reprinting.

Verify Job Expiration Set the expiration time that the printer prints a copy before printing the remaining

copies.

Note: Verify jobs print one copy to check if it is satisfactory before printing the

remaining copies.

Reserve Job Expiration Set the expiration time that the printer stores print jobs.

Note: Reserve held jobs are automatically deleted after printing.

Require All Jobs to be

Held

Set the printer to hold all print jobs.

Keep duplicate

documents

Set the printer to print all documents with the same ﬁle name.

Printing conﬁdential and other held jobs

For Windows users

1With a document open, click File > Print.

2Select a printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.

Printing 45

3Click Print and Hold.

4Select Use Print and Hold, and then assign a user name.

5Select the print job type (Conﬁdential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify).

If you select Conﬁdential, then secure the print job with a personal identiﬁcation number (PIN).

6Click OK or Print.

7From the printer control panel, release the print job.

•For conﬁdential print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > Conﬁdential > enter the PIN > select the print job > conﬁgure the

settings > Print

•For other print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > conﬁgure the settings > Print

Note: For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

For Macintosh users

Using AirPrint

1With a document open, choose File > Print.

2Select a printer, and then from the drop-down menu following the Orientation menu, choose PIN Printing.

3Enable Print with PIN, and then enter a four‑digit PIN.

4Click Print.

5From the printer control panel, release the print job. Navigate to:

Held jobs > select your computer name > Conﬁdential > enter the PIN > select the print job > Print

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

Using the print driver

1With a document open, choose File > Print.

2Select a printer, and then from the drop-down menu following the Orientation menu, choose Print and Hold.

3Choose Conﬁdential Print, and then enter a four‑digit PIN.

4Click Print.

5From the printer control panel, release the print job. Navigate to:

Held jobs > select your computer name > Conﬁdential > select the print job > enter the PIN > Print

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

Printing 46

Printing from a Cloud Connector proﬁle

This feature is available only in some printer models.

1From the home screen, touch Cloud Connector.

2Select a cloud service provider, and then select a proﬁle.

Note: For more information on creating a Cloud Connector proﬁle, see “Creating a Cloud Connector

proﬁle” on page 26.

3Tou ch Print, and then select a ﬁle.

If necessary, change the settings.

Note: Make sure to select a supported ﬁle.

4Print the document.

Printing a font sample list

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Reports > Print > Print Fonts

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Select a font sample.

Printing a directory list

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Reports > Print > Print Directory

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

Printing 47

Copying

Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

•Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided

documents.

•Load an original document faceup. For multiple‑page

documents, make sure to align the leading edge

before loading.

•Make sure to adjust the ADF guides to match the width

of the paper that you are loading.

•Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents,

book pages, small items (such as postcards or

photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media

(such as magazine clippings).

•Place the document facedown in the corner with the

arrow.

Making a copy

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the original document and the output have the same

paper size.

2From the control panel, select Copy, and then specify the number of copies.

If necessary, adjust the other settings.

3Copy the document.

Note: To make a quick copy, from the control panel, press .

Copying photos

1Place a photo on the scanner glass.

2From the control panel, navigate to:

Copy > Settings > Content > Content Type > Photo

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

3From the Content Source menu, select the setting that best matches the original photo.

4Copy the document.

Copying 48

Copying on letterhead

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the control panel, navigate to:

Copy > Copy From > select the size of the original document > Copy To > select a paper source

If you are loading into the multipurpose feeder, then navigate to:

Copy To > Multipurpose Feeder > select a paper size > Letterhead

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

3Copy the document.

Copying on both sides of the paper

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the control panel, navigate to:

Copy > Settings > Paper Setup

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

3Adjust the settings.

4Copy the document.

Reducing or enlarging copies

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the control panel, navigate to:

Copy > Settings > Scale > specify a scale value

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

Note: Changing the size of the original document or output after setting Scale restores the scale value to

Auto.

3Copy the document.

Collating copies

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the control panel, navigate to:

Copy > Settings > Collate > On [1,2,1,2,1,2]

3Copy the document.

Copying 49

Placing separator sheets between copies

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the control panel, navigate to:

Copy > Settings > Separator Sheets > On

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

3Adjust the settings.

4Copy the document.

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the control panel, navigate to:

Copy > Settings > Pages Per Side

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

3Adjust the settings.

4Copy the document.

Creating a copy shortcut

Note: You may need administrative rights to create a shortcut.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers

separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Shortcuts > Add Shortcut.

3From the Shortcut Type menu, select Copy, and then conﬁgure the settings.

4Apply the changes.

Copying 50

E-mailing

Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

•Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided

documents.

•Load an original document faceup. For multiple‑page

documents, make sure to align the leading edge

before loading.

•Make sure to adjust the ADF guides to match the width

of the paper that you are loading.

•Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents,

book pages, small items (such as postcards or

photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media

(such as magazine clippings).

•Place the document facedown in the corner with the

arrow.

Conﬁguring the e‑mail SMTP settings

Conﬁgure the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) settings to send a scanned document through e-mail. The

settings vary with each service provider. For more information, see supported e‑mail service providers.

Before you begin, make sure that the printer is connected to a network.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Settings > E‑mail.

3From the E‑mail Setup section, conﬁgure the settings.

4Click Save.

E-mailing 51

Using the Settings menu in the printer

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > E‑mail > E‑mail Setup

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Conﬁgure the settings.

Notes:

•For more information on the password, see e‑mail service providers.

•For e‑mail service providers that are not on the list, contact your provider and ask for the settings.

E‑mail service providers

•AOL Mail

•Comcast Mail

•Gmail

•iCloud Mail

•Mail.com

•NetEase Mail (mail.126.com)

•NetEase Mail (mail.163.com)

•NetEase Mail (mail.yeah.net)

•Outlook Live or Microsoft 365

•QQ Mail

•Sina Mail

•Sohu Mail

•Yah o o ! M a i l

•Zoho Mail

Notes:

•If you encounter errors using the settings provided, then contact your e‑mail service provider.

•For e‑mail service providers that are not on the list, contact your provider.

AOL Mail

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.aol.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address Your e ‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

E-mailing 52

Setting Value

Device UserID Yo u r e ‑mail address

Device Password App password

Note: To create an app password, go to the AOL Account Security page, log

in to your account, and then click Generate app password.

Comcast Mail

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.comcast.net

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address Your e ‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo u r e ‑mail address

Device Password Account password

GmailTM

Note: Make sure that two‑step veriﬁcation is enabled on your Google account. To enable two‑step

veriﬁcation, go to the Google Account Security page, log in to your account, and then from the “Signing in to

Google” section, click 2‑Step Veriﬁcation.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.gmail.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address Your e ‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo u r e ‑mail address

Device Password App password

Notes:

•To create an app password, go to the Google Account Security page, log

in to your account, and then from the “Signing in to Google” section, click

App passwords.

•“App passwords” shows only if two‑step veriﬁcation is enabled.

E-mailing 53

iCloud Mail

Note: Make sure that two‑step veriﬁcation is enabled on your account.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.mail.me.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address Your e ‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo u r e ‑mail address

Device Password App password

Note: To create an app password, go to the iCloud Account Management

page, log in to your account, and then from the Security section, click

Generate Password.

Mail.com

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.mail.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address Your e ‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo u r e ‑mail address

Device Password Account password

NetEase Mail (mail.126.com)

Note: Make sure that the SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the NetEase

Mail home page, click Settings > POP3/SMTP/IMAP, and then enable either IMAP/SMTP service or

POP3/SMTP service.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.126.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 465

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

E-mailing 54

Setting Value

Reply Address Your e ‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo u r e ‑mail address

Device Password Authorization password

Note: The authorization password is provided when IMAP/SMTP service or

POP3/SMTP service is enabled.

NetEase Mail (mail.163.com)

Note: Make sure that the SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the NetEase

Mail home page, click Settings > POP3/SMTP/IMAP, and then enable either IMAP/SMTP service or

POP3/SMTP service.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.163.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 465

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address Your e ‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo u r e ‑mail address

Device Password Authorization password

Note: The authorization password is provided when IMAP/SMTP service or

POP3/SMTP service is enabled.

NetEase Mail (mail.yeah.net)

Note: Make sure that the SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the NetEase

Mail home page, click Settings > POP3/SMTP/IMAP, and then enable either IMAP/SMTP service or

POP3/SMTP service.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.yeah.net

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 465

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address Your e ‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

E-mailing 55

Setting Value

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo u r e ‑mail address

Device Password Authorization password

Note: The authorization password is provided when IMAP/SMTP service or

POP3/SMTP service is enabled.

Outlook Live or Microsoft 365

These settings apply to outlook.com, hotmail.com e‑mail domains, and Microsoft 365 accounts.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.oce365.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address Your e ‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo u r e ‑mail address

Device Password Account password or app password

Notes:

•For accounts with two‑step veriﬁcation disabled, use your account

password.

•For outlook.com or hotmail.com accounts with two‑step veriﬁcation

enabled, use an app password. To create an app password, go to the

Outlook Live Account Management page, and then log in to your

account.

Note: For additional setup options for business using Microsoft 365, go to the Microsoft 365 help page.

QQ Mail

Note: Make sure that the SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the QQ Mail

home page, click Settings > Account. From the POP3/IMAP/SMTP/Exchange/CardDAV/CalDAV Service

section, enable either POP3/SMTP service or IMAP/SMTP service.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.qq.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address Your e ‑mail address

E-mailing 56

Setting Value

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo u r e ‑mail address

Device Password Authorization code

Note: To generate an authorization code, from the QQ Mail home page, click

Settings > Account, and then from the

POP3/IMAP/SMTP/Exchange/CardDAV/CalDAV Service section, click

Generate authorization code.

Sina Mail

Note: Make sure that the POP3/SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the

Sina Mail home page, click Settings > More settings > User‑end POP/IMAP/SMTP, and then enable

POP3/SMTP service.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.sina.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address Your e ‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo u r e ‑mail address

Device Password Authorization code

Note: To create an authorization code, from the e‑mail home page, click

Settings > More settings > User‑end POP/IMAP/SMTP, and then enable

Authorization code status.

Sohu Mail

Note: Make sure that the SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the Sohu

Mail home page, click Options > Settings > POP3/SMTP/IMAP, and then enable either IMAP/SMTP service

or POP3/SMTP service.

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.sohu.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 465

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address Your e ‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

E-mailing 57

Setting Value

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo u r e ‑mail address

Device Password Independent password

Note: The independent password is provided when IMAP/SMTP service or

POP3/SMTP service is enabled.

Yah o o! M ai l

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.mail.yahoo.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address Your e ‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo u r e ‑mail address

Device Password App password

Note: To create an app password, go to the Yahoo Account Security page,

Zoho Mail

Setting Value

Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.zoho.com

Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587

Use SSL/TLS Required

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate Disabled

Reply Address Your e ‑mail address

SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain

Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials

Device UserID Yo u r e ‑mail address

E-mailing 58

Setting Value

Device Password Account password or app password

Notes:

•For accounts with two‑step veriﬁcation disabled, use your account

password.

•For accounts with two‑step veriﬁcation enabled, use an app password. To

create an app password, go to the Zoho Mail Account Security page, log

in to your account, and then from the Application‑Speciﬁc Passwords

section, click Generate New Password.

Sending an e-mail

Before you begin, make sure that the SMTP settings are conﬁgured. For more information, see “Conﬁguring

the e‑mail SMTP settings” on page 51.

Using the control panel

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch E-mail, and then enter the needed information.

If necessary, conﬁgure the output ﬁle type settings.

3Send the e-mail.

Using a shortcut number

1Create an e‑mail shortcut.

aOpen a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers

separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

bClick Shortcuts > Add Shortcut.

cFrom the Shortcut Type menu, select E‑mail, and then conﬁgure the settings.

dApply the changes.

2Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

3From the control panel, navigate to:

Shortcuts > E‑mail

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

4Select the shortcut.

5Send the e‑mail.

E-mailing 59

Creating an e-mail shortcut

Note: You may need administrative rights to create a shortcut.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers

separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Shortcuts > Add Shortcut.

3From the Shortcut Type menu, select E‑mail, and then conﬁgure the settings.

4Apply the changes.

E-mailing 60

Faxing

Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

•Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided

documents.

•Load an original document faceup. For multiple‑page

documents, make sure to align the leading edge

before loading.

•Make sure to adjust the ADF guides to match the width

of the paper that you are loading.

•Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents,

book pages, small items (such as postcards or

photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media

(such as magazine clippings).

•Place the document facedown in the corner with the

arrow.

Setting up the printer to fax

Notes:

•The following connection methods are applicable only in some countries or regions.

•During the initial printer setup, clear the fax function check box and any other function you plan to set up

later, and then select Continue.

•If the fax function is enabled and not fully set up, then the indicator light may blink red.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or

receiving a fax.

Faxing 61

Supported fax

Printer model Analog fax etherFAX1Fax server Fax over IP (FoIP)2

CX421adn

CX522ade

CX522de X

CX622ade

CX622de X

CX625ade

CX625adhe

CX625de X

MC2325adw

MC2425adw

MC2535adw

MC2640adwe

1 Needs a subscription. For more information, go to https://www.etherfax.net/lexmark or contact the place where

you purchased the printer.

2 Needs an installed license bundle. For more information, contact the place where you purchased the printer.

Faxing 62

Printer model Analog fax etherFAX1Fax server Fax over IP (FoIP)2

XC2235

XC4240

XC4240i X

1 Needs a subscription. For more information, go to https://www.etherfax.net/lexmark or contact the place where

you purchased the printer.

2 Needs an installed license bundle. For more information, contact the place where you purchased the printer.

Setting up the fax function using analog fax

Notes:

•This feature is available only in some printer models.

•Some connection methods are applicable only in some countries or regions.

•If the fax function is enabled and not fully set up, then the indicator light may blink red.

•If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then use the control panel to set up fax.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch cables or the printer

in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax.

Using the Settings menu in the printer

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > General Fax settings

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Conﬁgure the settings.

Faxing 63

Using the Embedded Web Server

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers

separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > General Fax Settings.

3Conﬁgure the settings.

4Apply the changes.

Setting up the fax function using etherFAX

Notes:

•The printer ﬁrmware must be updated to the latest version. For more information, see “Updating

ﬁrmware” on page 274.

•An appropriate license bundle must be installed in your printer. For more information, contact etherFAX.

•Make sure that you have registered your printer to the etherFAX portal. For more information, go to

https://www.etherfax.net/lexmark.

•The printer serial number is required on registration. To locate the serial number, see “Finding the printer

serial number” on page 15.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers

separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > General Fax Settings.

Note: Fax Setup appears only if Fax Mode is set to Fax.

3In the Fax Name ﬁeld, type a unique name.

4In the Fax Number ﬁeld, enter the fax number that etherFAX provided.

5From the Fax Transport menu, select etherFAX.

6Apply the changes.

Faxing 64

Setting up the fax function using fax server

Notes:

•This feature lets you send fax messages to a fax service provider that supports e‑mail receiving.

•This feature supports outgoing fax messages only. To support fax receive, make sure that you have a

device‑based fax, such as analog fax, etherFAX, or Fax over IP (FoIP), conﬁgured in your printer.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers

separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Settings > Fax.

3From the Fax Mode menu, select Fax Server, and then click Save.

4Click Fax Server Setup.

5In the To Format ﬁeld, type [#]@myfax.com, where [#] is the fax number and myfax.com is the fax

provider domain.

Notes:

•If necessary, conﬁgure the Reply Address, Subject, or Message ﬁelds.

•To let the printer receive fax messages, enable the device‑based fax receive setting. Make sure that

you have a device‑based fax conﬁgured.

6Click Save.

7Click Fax Server E‑mail Settings, and then do either of the following:

•Enable Use E‑mail SMTP Server.

Note: If the E‑mail SMTP settings are not conﬁgured, then see “Conﬁguring the e‑mail SMTP settings”

on page 51.

•Conﬁgure the SMTP settings. For more information, contact your e‑mail service provider.

8Apply the changes.

Setting up fax using a standard telephone line

Note: These instructions apply only to printers that support analog fax. For more information, see “Supported

fax” on page 62.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make

any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a

lightning storm.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a

lightning storm.

Faxing 65

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of ﬁre, use only a 26 AWG or larger

telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone

network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media

Authority.

Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line

1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.

2Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

Notes:

•You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (set Auto Answer to On) or manually (set Auto

Answer to O).

•If you want to receive faxes automatically, then set the printer to pick up on a speciﬁed number of rings.

Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine

Note: If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for

the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes

automatically.

Faxing 66

Connected to the same telephone wall jack

Note: These instructions apply only to printers that have EXT and line ports.

•Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.

•Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.

•Connect the answering machine to the telephone port of the printer.

Faxing 67

Connected to dierent wall jacks

1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.

2Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.

Notes:

•If you have only one telephone number on your line, then set the printer to receive faxes automatically.

•Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering

machine picks up calls after four rings, then set the printer Rings to Answer setting to 6.

Setting up fax in countries or regions with dierent telephone wall jacks

and plugs

Note: These instructions apply only to printers that support analog fax. For more information, see “Supported

fax” on page 62.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make

any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a

lightning storm.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a

lightning storm.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of ﬁre, use only a 26 AWG or larger

telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone

network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media

Authority.

Faxing 68

The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ‑11. If the wall jack or equipment in your facility

is not compatible with this type of connection, then use a telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or

region may not come with your printer, and you may need to purchase it separately.

There may be an adapter plug installed in the telephone port of the printer. Do not remove the adapter plug

from the telephone port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded telephone system.

Part name Part number

Lexmark adapter plug 40X8519

Connecting the printer to a non‑RJ‑11 wall jack

1Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.

2Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.

3If you want to connect another device with a non‑RJ‑11 connector to the same wall jack, then connect it

directly to the telephone adapter.

Faxing 69

Connecting to a distinctive ring service

A distinctive ring service lets you have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line. Each telephone

number is assigned a dierent ring pattern.

Note: These instructions apply only to printers that support analog fax. For more information, see “Supported

fax” on page 62.

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings > Admin Controls > Answer On

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Select a ring pattern.

Setting the fax date and time

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 61.

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Preferences > Date and Time > Conﬁgure

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Conﬁgure the settings.

Conﬁguring daylight saving time

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 61.

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Preferences > Date and Time > Conﬁgure

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2In the Time Zone menu, select (UTC+user) Custom.

3Conﬁgure the settings.

Sending a fax

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 61.

Using the control panel

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the needed information.

If necessary, adjust the settings.

3Send the fax.

Faxing 70

Using the computer

Before you begin, make sure that the fax driver is installed. For more information, see “Installing the fax driver”

on page 272.

For Windows users

1From the document that you are trying to fax, open the Print dialog.

2Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.

3Click Fax > Enable fax > Always display settings prior to faxing, and then enter the recipient number.

If necessary, conﬁgure other fax settings.

4Send the fax.

For Macintosh users

1With a document open, choose File > Print.

2Select the printer that has ‑ Fax added after its name.

3In the To ﬁeld, enter the recipient number.

If necessary, conﬁgure other fax settings.

4Send the fax.

Scheduling a fax

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 61.

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the control panel, navigate to:

Fax > To > enter the fax number > Done

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

3Select Send Time to conﬁgure the date and time, and then select Done.

If necessary, conﬁgure other fax settings.

4Send the fax.

Creating a fax destination shortcut

Notes:

•You may need administrative rights to create a shortcut.

•Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 61.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Faxing 71

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers

separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Shortcuts > Add Shortcut.

3From the Shortcut Type menu, select Fax, and then conﬁgure the settings.

4Apply the changes.

Changing the fax resolution

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 61.

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the control panel, navigate to:

Fax > Resolution

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

3Select a setting.

4Send the fax.

Adjusting the fax darkness

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 61.

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the control panel, navigate to:

Fax > Darkness

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

3Select a setting.

4Send the fax.

Printing a fax log

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 61.

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Reports > Fax

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Select Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.

Faxing 72

Blocking junk faxes

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 61.

1From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings > Admin Controls

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Set Block No Name Fax to On.

Holding faxes

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 61

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings > Holding Faxes

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Select a mode.

Forwarding a fax

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 61.

1Create a destination shortcut.

aOpen a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers

separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

bClick Shortcuts > Add Shortcut.

cSelect a shortcut type, and then conﬁgure the settings.

Note: Take note of the shortcut number.

dApply the changes.

2Click Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings > Admin Controls.

3In the Fax Forwarding menu, select Forward or Print and Forward.

4In the Forward to menu, select the destination type and then type the shortcut number.

5Apply the changes.

Faxing 73

Scanning

Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass

Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

•Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided

documents.

•Load an original document faceup. For multiple‑page

documents, make sure to align the leading edge

before loading.

•Make sure to adjust the ADF guides to match the width

of the paper that you are loading.

•Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents,

book pages, small items (such as postcards or

photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media

(such as magazine clippings).

•Place the document facedown in the corner with the

arrow.

Scanning to a computer

Before you begin, make sure that:

•The printer ﬁrmware is updated. For more information, see “Updating ﬁrmware” on page 274.

•The computer and the printer are connected to the same network.

For Windows users

Using Lexmark ScanBack Utility

1From the computer, run Lexmark ScanBack Utility, and then click Next.

Note: To download the utility, go to www.lexmark.com/downloads.

2Click Setup, and then add the printer IP address.

Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

3Click Close > Next.

4Select the size of the original document, and then click Next.

5Select a ﬁle format and scan resolution, and then click Next.

6Type a unique scan proﬁle name, and then click Next.

Scanning 74

7Browse to the location you want to save the scanned document, create a ﬁle name, and then click Next.

Note: To re u se the s ca n proﬁle, enable Create Shortcut, and then create a unique shortcut name.

8Click Finish.

9Load an original document into the automatic document feeder or on the scanner glass.

10 From the printer control panel, navigate to Scan Proﬁles, and then select a scan proﬁle.

Note: Make sure that Scan Proﬁles is enabled. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Device >

Visible Home Screen Icons > Scan Proﬁles > Display. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Using Windows Fax and Scan

Note: Make sure that the printer is added to the computer. For more information, see “Adding printers to a

computer” on page 272.

1Load an original document into the automatic document feeder or on the scanner glass.

2From the computer, open Windows Fax and Scan.

3From the Source menu, select a scanner source.

4If necessary, change the scan settings.

5Scan the document.

For Macintosh users

Note: Make sure that the printer is added to the computer. For more information, see “Adding printers to a

computer” on page 272.

1Load an original document into the automatic document feeder or on the scanner glass.

2From the computer, do either of the following:

•Open Image Capture.

•Open Printers & Scanners, and then select a printer. Click Scan > Open Scanner.

3From the Scanner window, do one or more of the following:

•Select where you want to save the scanned document.

•Select the size of the original document.

•To scan from the ADF, select Document Feeder from the Scan Menu or enable Use Document Feeder.

•If necessary, conﬁgure the scan settings.

4Click Scan.

Scanning to an FTP server

1Load the original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the control panel, select FTP, and then enter the needed information.

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.

Scanning 75

3If necessary, conﬁgure other FTP settings.

4Scan the document.

Scanning to a network folder using a shortcut

1Create a network folder shortcut.

aOpen a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers

separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

bClick Shortcuts > Add Shortcut.

cFrom the Shortcut Type menu, select Network Folder, and then conﬁgure the settings.

dApply the changes.

2Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

3From the control panel, press # and the shortcut number that you created.

4Scan the document.

Creating an FTP shortcut

Note: You may need administrative rights to create a shortcut.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Shortcuts > Add Shortcut.

3From the Shortcut Type menu, select FTP, and then conﬁgure the settings.

4Apply the changes.

Scanning 76

Scanning to a ﬂash drive

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2Insert the ﬂash drive.

3Select Scan to USB and adjust the settings if necessary.

Note: If the USB Drive screen does not appear, then select USB Drive on the control panel.

4Scan the document.

Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch the ﬂash drive or

the printer in the area shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device.

Scanning 77

Scanning to a Cloud Connector proﬁle

This feature is available only in some printer models.

1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.

2From the home screen, touch Cloud Connector.

3Select a cloud service provider, and then select a proﬁle.

Note: For more information on creating a Cloud Connector proﬁle, see “Creating a Cloud Connector

proﬁle” on page 26.

4Tou ch Scan, and then assign a ﬁlename and destination folder.

5Tou ch Scan Here.

If necessary, change the scan settings.

6Scan the document.

Scanning 78

Understanding the printer menus

Menu map

Device •Preferences

•Eco‑Mode

•Remote Operator Panel

•Notiﬁcations

•Power Management

•Anonymous Data Collection

•Restore Factory Defaults

•Maintenance

•Visible Home Screen Icons

•About this Printer

Print •Layout

•Setup

•Quality

•Job Accounting

•XPS

•PDF

•PostScript

•PCL

•HTML

•Image

Paper •Tray Conﬁguration •Media Conﬁguration

Copy Copy Defaults

Fax Fax Defaults

E‑mail •E‑mail Setup

•E‑mail Defaults

•Web Link Setup

FTP FTP Defaults

USB Drive •Flash Drive Scan •Flash Drive Print

Network/Ports •Network Overview

•Wireless

•Wi‑Fi Direct

•Ethernet

•TCP/IP

•SNMP

•IPSec

•802.1x

•LPD Conﬁguration

•HTTP/FTP Settings

•ThinPrint

•USB

Security •Login Methods

•Schedule USB Devices

•Security Audit Log

•Login Restrictions

•Conﬁdential Print Setup

•Disk Encryption

•Erase Temporary Data Files

•Solutions LDAP Settings

•Miscellaneous

Reports •Menu Settings Page

•Device

•Print

•Shortcuts

•Fax

•Network

Understanding the printer menus 79

Help •Print All Guides

•Color Quality Guide

•Connection Guide

•Copy Guide

•E‑mail Guide

•Fax Guide

•Information Guide

•Media Guide

•Moving Guide

•Print Quality Guide

•Scan Guide

•Supplies Guide

Troubleshooting Print Quality Test Pages Cleaning the Scanner

Device

Preferences

Menu item Description

Display Language

[List of languages]

Set the language of the text that appears on the display.

Country/Region

[List of countries or regions]

Identify the country or region where the printer is conﬁgured

to operate.

Run initial setup

O*

Run the setup wizard.

Keyboard

Keyboard Type

[List of languages]

Select a language as a keyboard type.

Notes:

•All the Keyboard Type values may not appear or may

require special hardware to appear.

•This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Displayed information

Display Text 1 [IP Address*]

Display Text 2 [Date/Time*]

Custom Text 1

Custom Text 2

Specify the information to appear on the home screen.

Note: Custom Text 1 and Custom Text 2 appear only in some

printer models.

Date and Time

Conﬁgure

Current Date and Time

Manually Set Date and Time

Date Format [MM‑DD‑YYYY*]

Time Format [12 hour A.M./P.M.*]

Time Zone [GMT*]

Conﬁgure the printer date and time.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 80

Menu item Description

Date and Time

Network Time Protocol

Enable NTP [On*]

NTP Server

Enable Authentication

Conﬁgure the settings for Network Time Protocol (NTP).

Notes:

•Enable Authentication appears only in some printer

models.

•When Enable Authentication is set to MD5 key, Key ID

and Password appear.

Paper Sizes

U.S.*

Metric

Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes.

Note: The country or region selected in the initial setup

wizard determines the initial paper size setting.

Screen Brightness

20–100% (100*)

Adjust the brightness of the display.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Flash Drive Access

Enabled*

Disabled

Enable access to the ﬂash drive.

Allow Background Removal

On*

O

Specify whether background removal is allowed.

Allow Custom Job scans

On*

O

Scan multiple jobs to one ﬁle.

One Page Flatbed Scanning

O*

Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.

Audio Feedback

Button Feedback

On*

O

Enable audio feedback for button presses, panel interactions,

paper loaded prompts, and error notiﬁcations.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Audio Feedback

Volume

1–10 (5*)

Adjust the volume of the printer speakers.

Notes:

•Changes to the volume are applied after the current user

session ends.

•This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Screen Timeout

10–300 (60*)

Set the idle time in seconds before the display shows the home

screen, or before the printer logs o a user account

automatically.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 81

Eco-Mode

Menu item Description

Sides

1‑Sided*

2‑Sided

Specify whether to print on one side or two sides of the paper.

Pages per Side

O*

2 pages per side

3 pages per side

4 pages per side

6 pages per side

9 pages per side

12 pages per side

16 pages per side

Print multiple page images on one side of a sheet of paper.

Toner Darkness

1–10 (8*)

Determine the lightness or darkness of text images.

Copy

Sides

1 sided to 1 sided*

1 sided to 2 sided

2 sided to 1 sided

2 sided to 2 sided

Specify the scanning behavior based on the original

document.

Copy

Pages per Side

O*

2 Portrait pages

4 Portrait pages

2 Landscape pages

4 Landscape pages

Specify the scanning behavior based on the original

document.

Copy

Darkness

1–9 (5*)

Determine the darkness of the scanned text images.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 82

Remote Operator Panel

Menu item Description

External VNC Connection

Don’t Allow*

Allow

Connect an external Virtual Network Computing (VNC) client

to the remote control panel.

Authentication Type

None*

Standard Authentication

Set the authentication type when accessing the VNC client

server.

VNC Password Specify the password to connect to the VNC client server.

Note: This menu item appears only if Authentication Type is

set to Standard Authentication.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Notiﬁcations

Menu item Description

Error Lighting

O

On*

Set the indicator light to come on when a printer error occurs.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

ADF Loaded Beep

O

On*

Enable a sound when loading paper into the ADF.

Alarm Control

O

Single*

Continuous

Set the number of times that the alarm sounds when the printer

requires user intervention.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Supplies

Show Supply Estimates

Show estimates*

Do not show estimates

Show the estimated status of the supplies.

Supplies

Cartridge Alarm

O

Single*

Continuous

Set the number of times that the alarm sounds when the toner

cartridge is low.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

Primary SMTP Gateway

Type the IP address or host name of the primary SMTP server

for sending e-mail.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 83

Menu item Description

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

Primary SMTP Gateway Port

1–65535 (25*)

Enter the port number of the primary SMTP server.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

Secondary SMTP Gateway

Type the server IP address or host name of your secondary or

backup SMTP server.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

Secondary SMTP Gateway Port

1–65535 (25*)

Enter the server port number of your secondary or backup

SMTP server.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

SMTP Timeout

5‑30 seconds (30*)

Specify how long before the printer times out if the SMTP

server does not respond.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

Reply Address

Specify a reply address in the e‑mail.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

Always use SMTP default Reply Address

O*

Use the SMTP default Reply Address.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

Use SSL/TLS

Disabled*

Negotiate

Required

Send an e‑mail using an encrypted link.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate

O

On*

Require a trusted certiﬁcate when accessing the SMTP server.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 84

Menu item Description

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

SMTP Server Authentication

No authentication required*

NTLM

CRAM‑MD5

Digest‑MD5

Kerberos 5

Set the authentication type for the SMTP server.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

Device‑Initiated E‑mail

None*

Use Device SMTP Credentials

Set whether credentials are required for device‑initiated

e‑mails.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

User‑Initiated E‑mail

None

Use Device SMTP Credentials

Use Session User ID and Password

Use Session E‑mail address and

Password*

Prompt user

Set whether credentials are required for user‑initiated e‑mails.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

Use Active Directory Device Credentials

O

On*

Enable user credentials and group designations to connect to

the SMTP server.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

Device Userid

Specify the user ID to connect to the SMTP server.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

Device Password

Specify the password to connect to the SMTP server.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

Kerberos 5 REALM

Specify the realm for the Kerberos 5 authentication protocol.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

NTLM Domain

Specify the domain name for the NTLM security protocol.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 85

Menu item Description

E‑mail Alerts Setup

E‑mail Setup

Disable “SMTP server not set up” error

O*

Disable an SMTP setup error message to appear on the

display.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Error Prevention

Jam Assist

O

On*

Set the printer to ﬂush blank pages or pages with partial prints

automatically after a jammed page has been cleared.

Error Prevention

Auto Continue

O

On* (5 seconds)

Let the printer continue processing or printing a job

automatically after clearing certain printer conditions that

require user intervention.

Error Prevention

Auto Reboot

Reboot when idle

Reboot always*

Reboot never

Set the printer to restart when an error occurs.

Error Prevention

Auto Reboot

Max Auto Reboots

1–20 (2*)

Set the number of automatic reboots that the printer can

perform.

Error Prevention

Auto Reboot

Auto Reboot Window

1–525600 (720*)

Set the number of seconds before the printer performs an

automatic reboot.

Error Prevention

Auto Reboot

Auto Reboot Counter

Show a read‑only information of the reboot counter.

Error Prevention

Auto Reboot

Reset Auto Reboot Counter

Cancel

Continue

Reset Auto Reboot Counter.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Error Prevention

Display Short Paper Error

Auto‑clear*

Set the printer to show a message when a short paper error

occurs.

Note: Short paper refers to the size of the paper loaded.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 86

Menu item Description

Error Prevention

Page Protect

O*

Set the printer to process the entire page into the memory

before printing it.

Jam Content Recovery

Jam Recovery

O

Auto*

Set the printer to reprint jammed pages.

Jam Content Recovery

Scanner Jam Recovery

Job level

Page level*

Specify how to restart a scan job after resolving a paper jam.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Power Management

Menu item Description

Sleep Mode Proﬁle

Print from Sleep Mode

Stay awake after printing

Enter Sleep Mode after printing*

Set the printer to stay in Ready mode or return to Sleep mode

after printing.

Timeouts

Sleep Mode

1–120 minutes (15*)

Set the idle time before the printer begins operating in Sleep

mode.

Timeouts

Hibernate Timeout

Disabled

1 hour

2 hours

3 hours

6 hours

1 day

2 days

3 days*

1 week

2 weeks

1 month

Set the time before the printer turns o.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 87

Menu item Description

Timeouts

Hibernate Timeout on Connection

Hibernate

Do Not Hibernate*

Set Hibernate Timeout to turn o the printer while an active

Ethernet connection exists.

Schedule Power Modes

Schedules

Add New Schedule

Schedule the printer when to enter Sleep or Hibernate mode.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Anonymous Data Collection

Menu item Description

Anonymous Data Collection

Device Usage and Performance

Information

None*

Send printer usage and performance information to Lexmark.

Note: Anonymous Data Send Time appears only when you set

Anonymous Data Collection to Device Usage and Performance.

Anonymous Data Send Time

Start Time

Stop Time

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Accessibility

Note: This menu appears only in some printer models.

Menu item Description

Duplicate Key Strike Interval

0–5 (0*)

Set the interval in seconds during which the printer ignores duplicate key

presses on an attached keyboard.

Key Repeat Initial Delay

0.25–5 (1*)

Set the initial length of delay in seconds before a repeating key starts

repeating.

Note: This menu item appears only when a keyboard is attached to the

printer.

Key Repeat Rate

0.5–30 (30*)

Set the number of presses per second for a repeating key.

Note: This menu item appears only when a keyboard is attached to the

printer.

Prolong Screen Timeout

O*

Let the user remain in the same location and reset the Screen Timeout timer

when it expires instead of returning to the home screen.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 88

Menu item Description

Headphone Volume

1–10 (5*)

Adjust the headphone volume.

Note: This menu item appears only when a headphone is attached to the

printer.

Enable Voice Guidance When

Headphone Is Attached

O*

Enable Voice Guidance when a headphone is attached to the printer.

Speak Passwords/PINs

O*

Set the printer to read out loud passwords or personal identiﬁcation

numbers.

Note: This menu item appears only when a headphone or a speaker is

attached to the printer.

Speech Rate

Very Slow

Slow

Normal*

Fast

Faster

Very Fast

Rapid

Very Rapid

Fastest

Set the Voice Guidance speech rate.

Note: This menu item appears only when a headphone or a speaker is

attached to the printer.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Restore Factory Defaults

Menu item Description

Restore Settings

Restore all settings

Restore printer settings

Restore network settings

Restore app settings

Restore the printer factory default settings.

Note: Restore app settings appears only in some printer models.

Maintenance

Conﬁguration Menu

Menu item Description

USB Conﬁguration

USB PnP

Change the USB driver mode of the printer to improve its

compatibility with a personal computer.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 89

Menu item Description

USB Scan to Local

On*

O

Set whether the USB device driver enumerates as a USB

Simple device (single interface) or as a USB Composite device

(multiple interfaces).

USB Conﬁguration

USB Speed

Full

Auto*

Set the USB port to run at full speed and disable its high‑speed

capabilities.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Tray Conﬁguration

Tray Linking

Automatic*

O

Set the printer to link the trays that have the same paper type

and paper size settings.

Tray Conﬁguration

Show Tray Insert Message

O*

Display a message that lets the user change the paper size and

paper type settings after inserting the tray.

Tray Conﬁguration

Paper Prompts

Auto*

Multipurpose Feeder

Manual Paper

Envelope Prompts

Auto*

Multipurpose Feeder

Manual Paper

Set the paper source that the user ﬁlls when a prompt to load

paper or envelope appears.

Notes:

•The multipurpose feeder is available only in some printer

models.

•For Multipurpose Feeder to appear, set Conﬁgure MP to

Cassette from the Paper menu.

Tray Conﬁguration

Action for Prompts

Prompt user*

Continue

Use current

Set the printer to resolve paper- or envelope-related change

prompts.

Reports

Menu Settings Page

Event Log

Event Log Summary

HealthCheck Statistics

Print reports about printer menu settings, status, and event

logs.

Supply Usage And Counters

Clear Supply Usage History

Reset the supply usage history, such as number of pages and

days remaining, to the factory shipped level.

Supply Usage And Counters

Reset Maintenance Counter

Reset the counter after installing a new maintenance kit.

Supply Usage And Counters

Tiered Coverage Ranges

Adjust the range for the amount of color coverage on the

printed page.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 90

Menu item Description

Printer Emulations

PPDS Emulation

O*

Set the printer to recognize and use the PPDS data stream.

Fax Conﬁguration

Fax Low Power Support

Disable Sleep

Permit Sleep

Auto*

Set fax to enter Sleep mode whenever the printer determines

that it should.

Note: This menu item is available only in some printer

models.

Fax Conﬁguration

Fax Storage Location

Disk

NAND*

Set the storage location for all faxes.

Notes:

•This menu item is available only in some printer models.

•This menu item appears only when a hard disk is

installed.

Print Conﬁguration

Black Only Mode

O*

Print color content in grayscale.

Print Conﬁguration

Color Trapping

O

Enhance the printed output to compensate for misregistration

in the printer.

Print Conﬁguration

Font Sharpening

0–150 (24*)

Set a text point-size value below which the high‑frequency

screens are used when printing font data.

For example, if the value is 24, then all fonts sized 24 points or

less use the high‑frequency screens.

Device Operations

Quiet Mode

O*

Set the printer to operate in Quiet Mode.

Note: Enabling this setting slows down the printer

performance.

Device Operations

Panel Menus

O

On*

Enable access to the control panel menus.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 91

Menu item Description

Device Operations

Custom Supply Levels

O*

Let printservice read and edit values from the Embedded Web

Server.

Device Operations

Safe Mode

O*

Set the printer to operate in a special mode, in which it attempts

to continue oering as much functionality as possible, despite

known issues.

For example, when set to On, and the duplex motor is

nonfunctional, the printer performs one‑sided printing of the

documents even if the job is two‑sided printing.

Device Operations

Minimum Copy Memory

80 MB*

100 MB

Set the minimum memory allocation for storing copy jobs.

Device Operations

Clear Custom Status

Erase user‑deﬁned strings for the Default or Alternate custom

messages.

Device Operations

Clear all remotely‑installed messages

Erase messages that were remotely installed.

Device Operations

Automatically Display Error Screens

O

On*

Show existing error messages on the display after the printer

remains inactive on the home screen for a length of time equal

to the Screen Timeout setting.

Device Operations

Honor orientation on fast path copy

O*

Enable the printer to use the orientation setting under the Copy

menu when sending quick copy jobs.

Device Operations

Enable Optional Parallel Port

O*

Enable an optional parallel port.

Note: When set to On, the printer restarts.

Toner patch sensor setup

Calibration frequency preference

Disabled

Fewest color adjustment

Fewer color adjustment

Normal*

Better color accuracy

Best color accuracy

Set the printer to put down the correct amount of toner to

maintain color consistency.

Toner patch sensor setup

Full calibration

Run the full color calibration.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 92

Menu item Description

Toner patch sensor setup

Print TPS information page

Print a diagnostic page that contains information on toner patch

sensor calibration.

App Conﬁguration

LES Applications

O

On*

Enable the Lexmark Embedded Solutions (LES) applications.

Notes:

•This menu item is available only in some printer models.

•When set to On, this setting does not aect built‑in

applications.

Scanner Conﬁguration

Scanner Manual Registration

Print Quick Test

Print a Quick Test target page.

Note: Make sure that the margin spacing on the target page

is uniform all the way around the target. If it is not, then the

printer margins may need to be reset.

Scanner Conﬁguration

Scanner Manual Registration

Front ADF Registration

Rear ADF Registration

Flatbed Registration

Manually register the ﬂatbed and ADF after replacing the ADF,

scanner glass, or controller board.

Scanner Conﬁguration

Edge Erase

Flatbed Edge Erase

0–6 (3*)

ADF Edge Erase

0–6 (3*)

Set the size, in millimeters, of the no‑print area around an ADF

or ﬂatbed scan job.

Scanner Conﬁguration

ADF Deskew

ADF Mechanical Deskew

O

Auto*

Set the printer to perform ADF mechanical skew adjustment.

Scanner Conﬁguration

Disabled Scanner

Enabled*

Disabled

ADF Disabled

Disable the scanner when it is not working properly.

Scanner Conﬁguration

Ti Byte Order

CPU Endianness*

Little Endian

Big Endian

Set the byte order of a TIFF‑formatted scan output.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 93

Menu item Description

Scanner Conﬁguration

Exact Ti Rows Per Strip

On*

O

Set the RowsPerStrip tag value of a TIFF‑formatted scan output.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Out of Service Erase

Menu item Description

Out of Service Erase

Memory Last Sanitized

Hard Disk Last Sanitized

Show information on when the printer memory or hard disk was

last sanitized.

Note: Hard Disk Last Sanitized appears only in printers with a

hard disk installed.

Out of Service Erase

Sanitize all information on nonvolatile

memory

Sanitize all information on hard disk

Erase all printer and network settings

Clear all settings and applications that are stored in the printer

memory or hard disk.

Note: Sanitize all information on hard disk appears only in

printers with a hard disk installed.

Visible Home Screen Icons

Note: This menu appears only in some printer models.

Menu Description

Copy

E-mail

Fax

Status/Supplies

Job Queue

Change Language

Shortcut Center

Address Book

Bookmarks

Held Jobs

USB

FTP

Scan Proﬁles

App Proﬁles

Forms and Favorites

Scan Center

Card Copy

Specify which icons to show on the home screen.

Understanding the printer menus 94

About this Printer

Menu item Description

Asset Tag1Describe the printer. The maximum length is 32 characters.

Printer’s Location1Identify the printer location. The maximum length is 63 characters.

Contact1Personalize the printer name. The maximum length is 63 characters.

Export Conﬁguration File to USB2Export conﬁguration ﬁles to a ﬂash drive.

Export Compressed Logs to USB2Export compressed log ﬁles to a ﬂash drive.

Send Logs

Cancel

Send

Send diagnostic information to Lexmark.

1 In some printer models, this menu item can be conﬁgured only from the Embedded Web Server.

2 This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Layout

Menu item Description

Sides

1‑sided*

2‑sided

Specify whether to print on one side or two sides of the paper.

Flip Style

Long Edge*

Short Edge

Determine which side of the paper (long edge or short edge) is bound when

performing two‑sided printing.

Note: Depending on the option selected, the printer automatically osets

each printed information of the page to bind the job correctly.

Blank Pages

Do Not Print*

Print blank pages that are included in a print job.

Collate

O [1,1,1,2,2,2]*

On [1,2,1,2,1,2]

Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence, particularly when printing

multiple copies of the job.

Separator Sheets

None*

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Between Pages

Insert blank separator sheets when printing.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 95

Menu item Description

Separator Sheet Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Multipurpose Feeder

Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.

Note: The multipurpose feeder is available only in some printer models.

Pages per Side

O*

2 pages per side

3 pages per side

4 pages per side

6 pages per side

9 pages per side

12 pages per side

16 pages per side

Print multiple page images on one side of a sheet of paper.

Pages per Side Ordering

Horizontal*

Reverse Horizontal

Vertical

Reverse Vertical

Specify the positioning of multiple page images when using Pages per Side.

Note: The positioning depends on the number of page images and their

page orientation.

Pages per Side Orientation

Auto*

Landscape

Portrait

Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document when using Pages per

Side.

Pages per Side Border

None*

Solid

Print a border around each page image when using Pages per Side.

Copies

1–9999 (1*)

Specify the number of copies for each print job.

Print Area

Normal*

Fit to page

Whole Page

Set the printable area on a sheet of paper.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Setup

Menu item Description

Printer Language

PCL Emulation

PS Emulation*

Set the printer language.

Note: Setting a printer language default does not prevent a software

program from sending print jobs that use another printer language.

Job Waiting

O*

Preserve print jobs requiring supplies so that jobs not requiring the missing

supplies can print.

Note: This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 96

Menu item Description

Job Hold Timeout

0–255 (30*)

Set the time in seconds that the printer waits for user intervention before

it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other

jobs in the print queue.

Note: This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.

Printer Usage

Max Speed

Max Yield*

Determine how the color imaging kit operates during printing.

Notes:

•When set to Max Yield, the color imaging kit slows or stops while

printing groups of black-only pages.

•When set to Max Speed, the color imaging kit always runs while

printing, whether color or black pages are being printed.

Download Target

RAM*

Disk

Specify where to save all permanent resources, such as fonts and macros,

that have been downloaded to the printer.

Note: This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.

Resource Save

O*

Determine what the printer does with downloaded resources, such as

fonts and macros, when it receives a job that requires more than the

available memory.

Notes:

•When set to O, the printer retains downloaded resources only until

memory is needed. Resources associated with the inactive printer

language are deleted.

•When set to On, the printer preserves all the permanent

downloaded resources across all language switches. When

necessary, the printer shows memory full messages instead of

deleting permanent resources.

Print All Order

Alphabetical*

Newest First

Oldest First

Specify the order when you choose to print all held and conﬁdential jobs.

Note: This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Quality

Menu item Description

Print Mode

Black and White

Color*

Set the print mode.

Print Resolution

4800 CQ*

1200 dpi

Set the resolution for the printed output.

Note: 4800 CQ provides high‑quality output at maximum speed.

Toner Darkness

1 to 5 (4*)

Determine the lightness or darkness of text images.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 97

Menu item Description

Halftone

Normal*

Detail

Enhance the printed output to have smoother lines with sharper edges.

Color Saver

O*

Reduce the amount of toner used to print graphics and images.

RGB Brightness

‑6 to 6 (0*)

Adjust the brightness, contrast, and saturation for color output.

Note: This setting does not aect ﬁles where CMYK color speciﬁcations are

used.

RGB Contrast

0 to 5 (0*)

RGB Saturation

0 to 5 (0*)

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Advanced Imaging

Menu item Description

Color Balance

Cyan

‑5 to 5 (0*)

Magenta

‑5 to 5 (0*)

Ye l l o w

‑5 to 5 (0*)

Black

‑5 to 5 (0*)

Reset Defaults

Adjust the amount of toner that is used for each color.

Color Correction

O

Auto*

Manual

Color Correction Content

Modify the color settings used to print documents.

Notes:

•O sets the printer to receive the color correction from the software.

•Auto sets the printer to apply dierent color proﬁles to each object on the

printed page.

•Manual allows the customization of the RGB or CMYK color conversions

applied to each object on the printed page.

•Color Correction Content is available only when Color Correction is set to

Manual.

Color Samples

Print Color Samples

Print sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used

in the printer.

Color Adjust Calibrate the printer to adjust color variations in the printed output.

Spot Color Replacement

Set Custom CMYK

Assign speciﬁc CMYK values to twenty named spot colors.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 98

Menu item Description

RGB Replacement Match the colors of the output with that of the original document.

Notes:

•This menu item requires that you select the Display‑True‑Black color table.

•This menu item appears only in the Embedded Web Server.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Job Accounting

Note: This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.

Menu item Description

Job Accounting

O*

Set the printer to create a log of the print jobs that it receives.

Accounting Log Frequency

Daily

Weekly

Monthly*

Specify how often the printer creates a log ﬁle.

Log Action at End of Frequency

None*

E‑mail Current Log

E‑mail & Delete Current Log

Post Current Log

Post & Delete Current Log

Specify how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.

Note: The value deﬁned in Accounting Log Frequency determines when this

action is triggered.

Log Near Full Level

O*

Specify the maximum size of the log ﬁle before the printer executes the Log

Action at Near Full.

Log Action at Near Full

None*

E‑mail Current Log

E‑mail & Delete Current Log

E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log

Post Current Log

Post & Delete Current Log

Post & Delete Oldest Log

Delete Current Log

Delete Oldest Log

Delete All But Current

Delete All Logs

Specify how the printer responds when the hard disk is nearly full.

Note: The value deﬁned in Log Near Full Level determines when this action

is triggered.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 99

Menu item Description

Log Action at Full

None*

E‑mail & Delete Current Log

E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log

Post & Delete Current Log

Post & Delete Oldest Log

Delete Current Log

Delete Oldest Log

Delete All But Current

Delete All Logs

Specify how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit

(100MB).

URL to Post Log Specify where the printer posts job accounting logs.

E‑mail Address to Send Logs Specify the e‑mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.

Log File Preﬁx Specify the preﬁx for the log ﬁle name.

Note: The current host name deﬁned in the TCP/IP menu is used as the

default log ﬁle preﬁx.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

XPS

Menu item Description

Print Error Pages

O*

Print a test page that contains information on errors, including XML markup

errors.

Minimum Line Width

1–30 (2*)

Set the minimum stroke width.

Notes:

•Jobs printed in 1200 dpi use the value directly.

•Jobs printed in 4800 CQ use half the value.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

PDF

Menu item Description

Scale to Fit

O*

Scale the page content to ﬁt the selected paper size.

Annotations

Do Not Print*

Specify whether to print annotations in the PDF.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 100

PostScript

Menu item Description

Print PS Error

O*

Print a page that describes the PostScript® error.

Note: When an error occurs, processing of the job stops, the printer

prints an error message, and the rest of the print job is ﬂushed.

Minimum Line Width

1–30 (2*)

Set the minimum stroke width.

Notes:

•Jobs printed in 1200 dpi use the value directly.

•Jobs printed in 4800 CQ use half the value.

Lock PS Startup Mode

O*

Disable the SysStart ﬁle.

Image Smoothing

O*

Enhance the contrast and sharpness of low‑resolution images.

Note: This setting has no eect on images with a resolution of 300 dpi or

higher.

Font Priority

Resident*

Flash/Disk

Establish the font search order.

Notes:

•Resident sets the printer to search its memory for the requested font

before searching the ﬂash memory or printer hard disk.

•Flash/Disk sets the printer to search the ﬂash memory or printer hard

disk for the requested font before searching the printer memory.

•This menu item appears only when a ﬂash memory or printer hard

disk is installed.

Wait Timeout

O

On* (40 seconds)

Set the printer to wait for more data before canceling a print job.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

PCL

Menu item Description

Font Source

Resident*

Disk

Flash

All

Choose the source which contains the default font selection.

Notes:

•Flash and Disk appear only in some printer models.

•For Flash and Disk to appear, make sure that they are not read‑ or

write‑protected.

Font Name

[List of available fonts] (Courier*)

Select a font from the speciﬁed font source.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 101

Menu item Description

Symbol Set

[List of available symbol set] (10U

PC‑8*)

Specify the symbol set for each font name.

Note: A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters,

punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the dierent

languages or speciﬁc programs such as math symbols for scientiﬁc text.

Pitch

0.08–100 (10*)

Specify the pitch for ﬁxed or monospaced fonts.

Note: Pitch refers to the number of ﬁxed‑space characters in a horizontal

inch of type.

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.

Lines per Page

1–255

Specify the number of lines of text for each page printed through the PCL®

datastream.

Notes:

•This menu item activates vertical escapement that causes the

selected number of requested lines to print between the default

margins of the page.

•60 is the U.S. factory default setting. 64 is the international factory

default setting.

PCL5 Minimum Line Width

1–30 (2*)

Set the initial minimum stroke width.

Notes:

•Jobs printed in 1200 dpi use the value directly.

•Jobs printed in 4800CQ use half the value.

PCLXL Minimum Line Width

1–30 (2*)

A4 Width

198 mm*

203 mm

Set the width of the logical page on A4‑size paper.

Note: Logical page is the space on the physical page where data is

printed.

Auto CR after LF

O*

Set the printer to perform a carriage return after a line feed control

command.

Note: Carriage return is a mechanism that commands the printer to move

the position of the cursor to the ﬁrst position on the same line.

Auto LF after CR

O*

Set the printer to perform a line feed after a carriage return control

command.

Tray Renumber

Assign MP Feeder

Assign Tray [x]

Assign Manual Paper

Assign Manual Envelope

Conﬁgure the printer to work with a dierent print driver or custom

application that uses a dierent set of source assignments to request a

given paper source.

Choose from the following options:

O*—The printer uses the factory default paper source assignments.

None—The paper source ignores the Select Paper Feed command.

0–199—Select a numeric value to assign a custom value to a paper

source.

Note: The multipurpose feeder is available only in some printer models.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 102

Menu item Description

Tray Renumber

View Factory Defaults

Show the factory default value assigned for each paper source.

Tray Renumber

Restore Defaults

Restore the tray renumber values to their factory defaults.

Print Timeout

O

On* [90]

Set the printer to end a print job after it has been idle for the speciﬁed

amount of time in seconds.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

HTML

Menu item Description

Font Name

[List of fonts] (Times*)

Set the font to use for HTML documents.

Font Size

1–255 (12*)

Set the font size to use for HTML documents.

Scale

1–400% (100*)

Scale HTML documents.

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Set the page orientation for HTML documents.

Margin Size

8–255 mm (19*)

Set the page margin for HTML documents.

Backgrounds

Do Not Print

Print*

Print background information or graphics for HTML documents.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Image

Menu item Description

Auto Fit

O*

Select the best available paper size and orientation setting for an image.

Note: When set to On, this menu item overrides the scaling and orientation

settings for the image.

Invert

O*

Invert bitonal monochrome images.

Note: This menu item does not apply to GIF or JPEG image formats.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 103

Menu item Description

Scaling

Anchor Top Left

Best Fit*

Anchor Center

Fit Height/Width

Fit Height

Fit Width

Adjust the image to ﬁt the printable area.

Note: When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Reverse Portrait

Reverse Landscape

Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Paper

Tray Conﬁguration

Menu item Description

Default Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Multipurpose Feeder

Manual Paper

Manual Envelope

Set the paper source for all print jobs.

Note: Multipurpose Feeder only appears when Conﬁgure MP is set to

Cassette.

Paper Size/Type

Tray [x]

Multipurpose Feeder

Manual Paper

Manual Envelope

Specify the paper size or paper type loaded in each paper source.

Substitute Size

O

Statement/A5

Letter/A4

All Listed*

Set the printer to substitute a speciﬁed paper size if the requested size is not

loaded in any paper source.

Notes:

•O prompts the user to load the required paper size.

•Statement/A5 prints an A5‑size document on statement when loading

statement, and statement‑size jobs on A5 paper size when loading A5.

•Letter/A4 prints an A4‑size document on letter when loading letter, and

letter‑size jobs on A4 paper size when loading A4.

•All Listed substitutes Letter/A4.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 104

Media Conﬁguration

Universal Setup

Menu item Description

Units of Measure

Inches

Millimeters

Specify the unit of measurement for the universal paper.

Note: Inches is the U.S. factory default setting. Millimeters is the

international factory default setting.

Portrait Width

3–14.17 inches (8.50*)

76–359.91 mm (216*)

Set the portrait width of the universal paper.

Portrait Height

3–14.17 inches (14*)

76–359.91 mm (356*)

Set the portrait height of the universal paper.

Feed Direction

Short Edge*

Long Edge

Set the printer to pick paper from the short edge or long edge

direction.

Note: Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter

than the maximum width supported.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Custom Scan Sizes

Menu item Description

Custom Scan Size [x]

Scan Size Name

Width

1–8.50 inches (8.50*)

25–216 mm (216*)

Height

1–14 inches (14*)

25–356 mm (297*)

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

2 scans per side

O*

Assign a scan size name and conﬁgure the scan settings.

Understanding the printer menus 105

Media Types

Menu item Description

Plain

Card Stock

Recycled

Glossy

Labels

Vinyl Labels

Bond

Envelope

Letterhead

Preprinted

Colored Paper

Light

Heavy

Rough/Cotton

Custom Type [x]

Specify the texture and weight of the paper loaded.

Copy

Copy Defaults

Menu item Description

Content Type

Text

Text / Ph o t o*

Photo

Graphics

Improve the output result based on the content of the original document.

Content Source

Black and White Laser

Color Laser*

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Improve the output result based on the source of the original document.

Sides

1 sided to 1 sided*

1 sided to 2 sided

2 sided to 1 sided

2 sided to 2 sided

Specify the scanning behavior based on the original document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 106

Menu item Description

Separator Sheets

None*

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Between Pages

Specify whether to insert blank separator sheets when printing.

Separator Sheet Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Multipurpose Feeder

Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.

Color

O

On*

Auto

Specify whether to print copies in color.

Pages per Side

O*

2 Portrait pages

4 Portrait pages

2 Landscape pages

4 Landscape pages

Specify the number of page images to print on one side of a sheet of paper.

Print Page Borders

O*

Place a border around each image when printing multiple pages on a single

page.

Collate

O [1,1,1,2,2,2]

On [1,2,1,2,1,2]*

Print multiple copies in sequence.

“Copy from” Size

[List of paper sizes]

Set the paper size of the original document.

Notes:

•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory

default setting.

•This menu item may vary depending on your printer model.

“Copy to” Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Multipurpose Feeder

Auto Size Match

Specify the paper source for the copy job.

Tem perature

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Specify whether to generate a cooler or warmer output.

Darkness

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the darkness of the scanned image.

Number of Copies

1–9999 (1*)

Specify the number of copies.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 107

Menu item Description

Header/Footer

Top left

Top middle

Top right

Bottom left

Bottom middle

Bottom right

Apply a header or footer on the printed output.

Overlay

Conﬁdential

Copy

Draft

Urgent

Custom

O*

Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.

Custom overlay Type a custom overlay text.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Advanced Imaging

Menu item Description

Color Balance

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the amount of toner being used in each color.

Color Dropout

None*

Red

Green

Blue

Default Red Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Default Green Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Default Blue Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Specify which color to drop during scanning, and adjust the dropout setting for

that color.

Auto Color Detect

Color Sensitivity

1–9 (5*)

Area Sensitivity

1–9 (5*)

Set the amount of color that the printer detects from the original document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 108

Menu item Description

Contrast

Best for Content*

Specify the contrast of the output.

Background Removal

Background Detection

Content‑based*

Fixed

Level

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.

Note: If you want to remove the background color from the original document,

then set Background Detection to Content-based. If you want to remove

image noise from a photo, then set Background Detection to Fixed.

Auto Center

O*

Align the content at the center of the page.

Mirror Image

O*

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image

O*

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Scan Edge to Edge

O*

Allow edge‑to‑edge scanning of the original document.

Sharpness

1–5 (3*)

Adjust the sharpness of a scanned image.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Admin Controls

Menu item Description

Allow Color Copies

O

On*

Print copies in color.

Allow Priority Copies

O

On*

Interrupt a print job to copy a page or document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 109

Menu item Description

Custom Job Scanning

O*

Turn on scanning of custom jobs by default.

Allow Save as Shortcut

O

On*

Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.

Sample Copy Print a sample copy.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Fax

Fax Defaults

Fax Mode

Menu item Description

Fax Mode

Fax

Fax Server

Disabled

Select a fax mode.

Note: Depending on your printer model, the factory default

setting may vary.

Fax Setup

General Fax settings

Menu item Description

Fax Name Identify your fax machine.

Fax Number Identify your fax number.

Fax ID

Fax Name

Fax Number*

Notify fax recipients of your fax name or fax number.

Enable Manual Fax

O*

Set the printer to fax manually.

Notes:

•This menu item requires a line splitter and a telephone handset.

•Use a regular telephone line to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a

fax number.

•To go directly to the manual fax function, touch # and 0 on the keypad.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 110

Menu item Description

Memory Use

All receive

Mostly receive

Equal*

Mostly send

All send

Set the amount of internal printer memory allocated for faxing.

Note: This menu item prevents memory buer conditions and failed faxes.

Cancel Faxes

Allow*

Don't Allow

Cancel outgoing faxes before they are transmitted, or cancel incoming faxes

before they ﬁnish printing.

Fax Number Masking

O*

From Left

From Right

Specify the format for masking an outgoing fax number.

Digits to Mask

0–58 (0*)

Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.

Enable Line Connected

Detection

On*

O

Determine whether a telephone line is connected to the printer.

Note: Detection takes place when turning on the printer and before each call.

Enable Line In Wrong Jack

Detection

O

On*

Determine whether a telephone line is connected to the correct port on the

printer.

Note: Detection takes place when turning on the printer and before each call.

Enable Extension in Use

Support

O

On*

Determine whether a telephone line is used by another device, such as another

phone on the same line.

Note: Detection takes place when turning on the printer and before each call.

Optimize Fax Compatibility Conﬁgure the printer fax functionality for optimal compatibility with other fax

machines.

Fax Transport

T.38

Analog

G.711

etherFAX

Set the fax transport method.

Notes:

•This menu item appears only if an etherFAX or Fax over IP (FoIP) license

bundle is installed in the printer.

•Depending on your printer model, the factory default settings may vary.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

HTTPS Fax Settings

Note: This menu appears only if Fax Transport is set to etherFAX.

Understanding the printer menus 111

Menu item Description

HTTPS service URL Specify the etherFAX service URL.

HTTPS Proxy Specify a proxy server URL.

HTTPS Proxy User Specify the user name and password for the proxy server.

HTTPS Proxy Password

Fax Send Encryption

Disabled

Enabled*

Required

Enable encryption for outgoing fax messages.

Fax Receive Encryption

Disabled

Enabled*

Required

Enable encryption for incoming fax messages.

HTTPS Fax Status Show the etherFAX communication status.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Fax Send Settings

Menu item Description

Resolution

Standard*

Fine

Super Fine

Ultra Fine

Set the resolution of the scanned image.

Note: A higher resolution increases fax transmission time and requires more

memory.

Original Size

[List of paper sizes] (Mixed

Sizes*)

Specify the size of the original document.

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Specify the orientation of the original document.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Sides

O*

Short Edge

Long Edge

Specify the orientation of the original document when scanning on both sides

of the document.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

Content Type

Text *

Text / Ph o t o

Photo

Graphics

Improve the output result based on the content of the original document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 112

Menu item Description

Content Source

Black and White Laser

Color Laser*

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Improve the output result based on the source of the original document.

Darkness

1–9 (5*)

Adjust the darkness of the scanned image.

Behind a PABX

O*

Set the printer to dial a fax number without waiting to recognize the dial tone.

Note: Private Automated Branch Exchange (PABX) is a telephone network that

allows a single access number to oer multiple lines to outside callers.

Dial Mode

Ton e*

Pulse

Specify the dial mode for incoming or outgoing faxes.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Advanced Imaging

Menu item Description

Color Balance

Cyan ‑ Red

-4 to 4 (0*)

Magenta ‑ Green

-4 to 4 (0*)

Ye l l o w ‑ Blue

-4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the color intensity during scanning.

Color Dropout

Color Dropout (None*)

Default Red Threshold (128*)

Default Green Threshold

(128*)

Default Blue Threshold (128*)

Specify which color to drop during scanning, and adjust the dropout setting for

that color.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 113

Menu item Description

Contrast

Best for Content*

Set the contrast of the output.

Background Removal

Level

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.

Mirror Image

O*

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image

O*

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Scan Edge to Edge

O*

Allow edge‑to‑edge scanning of the original document.

Sharpness

1–5 (3*)

Adjust the sharpness of the scanned image.

Tem perature

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Specify whether to generate a cooler or warmer output.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Admin Controls

Menu item Description

Enable Color Fax Scans

O by Default*

On by Default

Never Use

Always Use

Enable color scans for fax.

Automatic Redial

0–9 (5*)

Adjust the number of redial attempts based on the activity levels of recipient fax

machines.

Redial Frequency

1–200 minutes (3*)

Increase the time between redial attempts to increase the chance of sending

fax successfully.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 114

Menu item Description

Enable ECM

On*

O

Activate Error Correction Mode (ECM) for fax jobs.

Note: ECM detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process caused

by telephone line noise and poor signal strength.

Enable Fax Scans

On*

O

Fax documents that are scanned at the printer.

Driver to Fax

On*

O

Allow the print driver to send fax.

Allow Save as Shortcut

On*

O

Save fax numbers as shortcuts on the printer.

Max Speed

33600*

14400

9600

4800

2400

Set the maximum speed for sending fax.

Custom Job Scanning

O*

Turn on scanning of custom jobs by default.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Scan Preview

O*

Show a preview of the scan on the display.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Adjust ADF Skew

O*

Correct slight skew in the scanned image.

Auto Convert Color Faxes to

Mono Faxes

On*

O

Convert all outgoing color faxes to black and white.

Conﬁrm Fax Number

O*

Ask the user to conﬁrm the fax number.

Dial Preﬁx Set a dialing preﬁx.

Dialing Preﬁx Rules Establish a dialing preﬁx rule.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 115

Fax Receive Settings

Menu item Description

Fax Job Waiting

None*

Ton e r

Toner and Supplies

Remove fax jobs that request speciﬁc unavailable resources from the print

queue.

Rings to Answer

1–25 (3*)

Set the number of rings for incoming fax.

Auto Reduction

On*

O

Scale incoming fax to ﬁt on the page.

Paper Source

Tray [X]

Auto*

Set the paper source for printing incoming fax.

Sides

O*

Print on both sides of the paper.

Separator Sheets

None*

Before Job

After Job

Specify whether to insert blank separator sheets when printing.

Separator Sheet Source

Tray [X] (1*)

Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.

Output Bin

Standard Bin

Specify the output bin for received faxes.

Fax Footer

O*

Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received

fax.

Fax Footer Time Stamp

Receive*

Print the time stamp at the bottom of each page from a received fax.

Staple

O*

1 staple

2 staples

Staple the printed fax document.

Note: This menu item appears only when a ﬁnisher is installed.

Holding Faxes

Held Fax Mode

O*

Always On

Manual

Scheduled

Hold received faxes from printing until they are released.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 116

Admin Controls

Menu item Description

Enable Fax Receive

On*

O

Set the printer to receive fax.

Enable Color Fax Receive

On*

O

Set the printer to receive fax in color.

Enable Caller ID

O*

Show the number that is sending the incoming fax.

Block No Name Fax

O*

Block incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax ID speciﬁed.

Banned Fax List

Add Banned Fax

Specify the phone numbers that you want to block.

Answer On

All Rings*

Single Ring Only

Double Ring Only

Triple Ring Only

Single or Double Rings Only

Single or Triple Rings Only

Double or Triple Rings Only

Set a distinctive ring pattern for incoming fax.

Auto Answer

On*

O

Set the printer to receive fax automatically.

Manual Answer Code

0–9 (9*)

Manually enter a code on the telephone number pad to begin receiving fax.

Notes:

•This menu item appears only when the printer shares a line with a

telephone.

•This menu item appears only when you set the printer to receive fax

manually.

Fax Forwarding

Print*

Print and Forward

Forward

Specify whether to forward received fax.

Forward To

Destination 1

Destination 2

Specify where to forward received fax.

Note: This menu item appears only when Fax Forwarding is set to Print and

Forward or Forward.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 117

Menu item Description

Max Speed

33600*

14400

9600

4800

2400

Set the maximum speed for transmitting fax.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Fax Cover Page

Menu item Description

Fax Cover Page

O by Default*

On by Default

Never Use

Always Use

Conﬁgure the settings for the fax cover page.

Include To ﬁeld

O*

Include From ﬁeld

O*

From

Include Message Field

O*

Message:

Include Logo

O*

Include Footer [x]

O*

Footer [x]

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 118

Fax Log settings

Menu item Description

Transmission Log Frequency

Always*

Never

Only for Error

Specify how often the printer creates a transmission log.

Transmission Log Action

O

On*

E‑mail

O*

Print or e‑mail a log for successful fax transmission or transmission error.

Receive Error Log

Print Never*

Print on Error

Print a log for fax‑receive failures.

Auto Print Logs

On*

O

Print all fax activity.

Log Paper Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Specify the paper source for printing logs.

Logs Display

Remote Fax Name*

Dialed Number

Identify the sender by remote fax name or fax number.

Enable Job Log

On*

O

View a summary of all fax jobs.

Enable Call Log

On*

O

View a summary of fax dialing history.

Log Output Bin

Standard Bin*

Bin [x]

Specify the output bin for printed logs.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Speaker settings

Menu item Description

Speaker Mode

Always O*

Always On

On until Connected

Set the fax speaker mode.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 119

Menu item Description

Speaker Volume

Low*

High

Adjust the fax speaker volume.

Ringer Volume

O*

Enable the ringer volume.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Fax Server Setup

General Fax Settings

Menu item Description

To F ormat Specify a fax recipient.

Note: If you want to use the fax number, then type the number sign (#) before

a number.

Reply Address Specify a reply address for sending fax.

Subject Specify the fax subject and message.

Message

Enable analog receive

O*

Set the printer to receive analog faxes.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Fax Server E‑mail Settings

Menu item Description

Use E‑mail SMTP Server

On*

O

Use the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) settings for e‑mail in receiving

and sending faxes.

Note: When set to On, all other settings of theFax Server E‑mail Settings

menu are not shown.

Primary SMTP Gateway Type the IP address or host name of the primary SMTP server.

Primary SMTP Gateway Port

1–65535 (25*)

Enter the port number of the primary SMTP server.

Secondary SMTP Gateway Type the server IP address or host name of your secondary or backup SMTP

server.

Secondary SMTP Gateway Port

1–65535 (25*)

Enter the server port number of your secondary or backup SMTP server.

SMTP Timeout

5–30 (30*)

Set the time before the printer times out if the SMTP server does not respond.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 120

Menu item Description

Reply Address Specify a reply address for sending fax.

Use SSL/TLS

Disabled*

Negotiate

Required

Specify whether to send fax using an encrypted link.

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate

O

On*

Specify a trusted certiﬁcate when accessing the SMTP server.

SMTP Server Authentication

No authentication required*

NTLM

CRAM‑MD5

Digest‑MD5

Kerberos 5

Set the authentication type for the SMTP server.

Device‑Initiated E‑mail

None*

Use Device SMTP Credentials

Specify whether credentials are required for device‑initiated e‑mail.

User‑Initiated E‑mail

None*

Use Device SMTP Credentials

Use Session User ID and

Password

Use Session E‑mail address

and Password

Prompt user

Specify whether credentials are required for user‑initiated e‑mail.

Use Active Directory Device

Credentials

O*

Enable user credentials and group destinations to connect to the SMTP server.

Device Userid Specify the user ID and password to connect to the SMTP server.

Device Password

Kerberos 5 REALM Specify the realm for the Kerberos 5 authentication protocol.

NTLM Domain Specify the domain name for the NTLM security protocol.

Disable "SMTP server not set

up" error

O*

Hide the “SMTP server not set up” error message.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 121

Fax Server Scan Settings

Menu item Description

Image Format

TIFF (.tif)

PDF (.pdf)*

XPS (.xps)

Specify the ﬁle format for the scanned image.

Content Type

Text *

Text / Ph o t o

Photo

Graphics

Improve the output result based on the content of the original document.

Content Source

Black and White Laser

Color Laser*

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Improve the output result based on the source of the original document.

Fax Resolution

Standard*

Fine

Super Fine

Ultra Fine

Set the fax resolution.

Sides

O*

Short Edge

Long Edge

Specify the orientation of the original document when scanning on both sides

of the document.

Darkness

1–9 (5*)

Set the darkness of the output.

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.

Original Size

[List of paper sizes]

Set the paper size of the original document.

Notes:

•Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international

factory default setting.

•This setting may vary depending on your printer model.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 122

Menu item Description

Use Multi‑Page TIFF

O

On*

Choose between single‑ and multiple‑page TIFF ﬁles.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

E-mail

E‑mail Setup

Menu item Description

Primary SMTP Gateway Type the IP address or host name of the primary SMTP server for sending e-

mail.

Primary SMTP Gateway Port

1–65535 (25*)

Enter the port number of the primary SMTP server.

Secondary SMTP Gateway Type the server IP address or host name of your secondary or backup SMTP

server.

Secondary SMTP Gateway Port

1–65535 (25*)

Enter the server port number of your secondary or backup SMTP server.

SMTP Timeout

5–30 seconds (30*)

Set the time before the printer times out if the SMTP server does not respond.

Reply Address Specify a reply address in the e‑mail.

Always use SMTP default Reply

Address

On*

O

Always use the default reply address in the SMTP server.

Use SSL/TLS

Disabled*

Negotiate

Required

Specify whether to send e‑mail using an encrypted link.

Require Trusted Certiﬁcate

O

On*

Require a trusted certiﬁcate when accessing the SMTP server.

SMTP Server Authentication

No authentication required*

NTLM

CRAM‑MD5

Digest‑MD5

Kerberos 5

Set the authentication type for the SMTP server.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 123

Menu item Description

Device‑Initiated E‑mail

None*

Use Device SMTP Credentials

Specify whether credentials are required for device‑initiated e‑mail.

User‑Initiated E‑mail

None*

Use Device SMTP Credentials

Use Session User ID and

Password

Use Session E‑mail address

and Password

Prompt user

Specify whether credentials are required for user‑initiated e‑mail.

Use Active Directory Device

Credentials

O

On*

Enable user credentials and group designations to connect to the SMTP server.

Device Userid Specify the user ID and password to connect to the SMTP server.

Device Password

Kerberos 5 REALM Specify the realm for the Kerberos 5 authentication protocol.

NTLM Domain Specify the domain name for the NTLM security protocol.

Disable "SMTP server not set

up" error

O*

Hide the “SMTP server not set up” error message.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

E‑mail Defaults

Menu item Description

Subject Specify the e‑mail subject and message.

Message

File Name Specify the ﬁle name for the scanned image.

Format

PDF (.pdf)*

TIFF (.tif)

JPEG (.jpg)

XPS (.xps)

TXT (.txt)

RTF (.rtf)

DOCX (.docx)

Specify the ﬁle format for the scanned image.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 124

Menu item Description

Global OCR Settings

Recognized Languages

Auto Rotate

Despeckle

Auto Contrast Enhance

Conﬁgure the settings for optical character recognition (OCR).

Note: This menu item appears only if you have purchased and installed an

OCR solution.

PDF Settings

PDF Version

1.3

1.4

1.5*

1.6

1.7

Archival Version

A‑1a*

A‑1b

Highly Compressed

O*

Secure

O*

Searchable

O*

Archival (PDF/A)

O*

Set the PDF format of the scanned image.

Content Type

Text

Text / Ph o t o*

Photo

Graphics

Improve the output result based on the content of the original document.

Content Source

Black and White Laser*

Color Laser

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Improve the output result based on the original document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 125

Menu item Description

Color

Black and White

Gray

Color*

Auto

Specify the color when scanning an image.

Resolution

75 dpi

150 dpi*

200 dpi

300 dpi

400 dpi

600 dpi

Set the resolution of the scanned image.

Darkness

-4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the darkness of the scanned image.

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.

Original Size

[List of paper sizes]

Set the paper size of the original document.

Note: Mixed Sizes is the factory default setting.

Sides

O*

Long Edge

Short Edge

Specify the page orientation of text and graphics when scanning a two‑sided

document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Advanced Imaging

Menu item Description

Color Balance

Cyan to Red

-4 to 4 (0*)

Magenta to Green

-4 to 4 (0*)

Ye l l o w t o B l u e

-4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the color intensity during scanning.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 126

Menu item Description

Color Dropout

None*

Red

Green

Blue

Default Red Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Default Green Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Default Blue Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Specify which color to drop during scanning, and adjust the dropout setting for

that color.

Auto Color Detect

Color Sensitivity

1–9 (5*)

Area Sensitivity

1–9 (5*)

E‑mail Bit Depth

1 bit*

8 bit

Set the amount of color that the printer detects from the original document.

Note: This menu item appears only when Color is set to Auto.

JPEG Quality

Best for content*

5–95

Set the quality of a JPEG‑format scanned image.

Notes:

•5 reduces the ﬁle size, but lessens the image quality.

•95 provides the best image quality, but produces a large ﬁle size.

Contrast

Best for content*

Specify the contrast of the output.

Background Removal

Background Detection

Content‑based*

Fixed

Level

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.

Note: If you want to remove the background color from the original

document, then set Background Detection to Content-based. If you want to

remove image noise from a photo, then set Background Detection to Fixed.

Mirror Image

O*

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 127

Menu item Description

Negative Image

O*

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Scan Edge to Edge

O*

Allow edge‑to‑edge scanning of the original document.

Sharpness

1–5 (3*)

Adjust the sharpness of a scanned image.

Tem perature

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Specify whether to generate a cooler or warmer output.

Blank Pages

Blank Page Removal

Blank Page Sensitivity

Specify whether to include blank pages.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Admin Controls

Menu item Description

Max E‑mail Size

0–65535 (0*)

Set the allowable ﬁle size for each e‑mail.

Size Error Message Specify an error message that the printer sends when an e‑mail exceeds its

allowable ﬁle size.

Note: You can type up to 1024 characters.

Limit Destinations Limit sending of e‑mail only to the speciﬁed list of domain names.

Note: Use a comma to separate each domain.

Send Me a Copy

Never appears*

On by Default

O by Default

Always On

Send a copy of the e‑mail to yourself.

Limit E‑mail Recipients

O*

Limit the number of e‑mail recipients.

Use cc:/bcc:

O*

Enable carbon copy and blind carbon copy in e‑mail.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 128

Menu item Description

Use Multi‑Page TIFF

On*

O

Choose between single- and multiple‑page TIFF ﬁles.

TIFF Compression

LZW*

JPEG

Set a compression option for TIFF ﬁles.

Tex t Defau lt

5–95 (75*)

Set the quality of text on a scanned image.

Tex t/Phot o Default

5–95 (75*)

Set the quality of text or photo on a scanned image.

Photo Default

5–95 (50*)

Set the quality of a photo on a scanned image.

Transmission Log

Print log*

Do Not Print Log

Print Only For Error

Print a log for successful e‑mail transmission.

Log Paper Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Multipurpose Feeder

Specify the paper source for printing logs.

Custom Job Scanning

O*

Turn on scanning of custom jobs by default.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Scan Preview

O

On*

Show the scan preview on the display.

Note: This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.

Allow Save as Shortcut

O

On*

Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.

Note: When set to O, the Save As Shortcut button does not appear on the

e-mail Destination screen.

E‑mail Images Sent As

Attachment*

Web Link

Specify how to send the images in e‑mail.

Reset E-mail Information After

Sending

O

On*

Restore the default e-mail information after sending an e-mail.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 129

Web Link Setup

Menu item Description

Server Set the printer to send e‑mail as a web link.

Password

Path

File Name

Web Link

FTP

FTP Defaults

Menu item Description

Format

PDF (.pdf)*

TIFF (.tif)

JPEG (.jpg)

XPS (.xps)

TXT (.txt)

RTF (.rtf)

DOCX (.docx)

Specify the ﬁle format for the scanned image.

Note: The menu items may vary depending on your printer model.

Global OCR Settings

Recognized Languages

Auto Rotate

Despeckle

Auto Contrast Enhance

Conﬁgure the settings for optical character recognition (OCR).

Note: This menu appears only if you have purchased and installed an OCR

solution.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 130

Menu item Description

PDF Settings

PDF Version

1.3

1.4

1.5*

1.6

1.7

Archival Version

A‑1a*

A‑1b

Secure

O*

Archival (PDF/A)

O*

Set the PDF format for the scanned image.

Content Type

Text

Text / Ph o t o*

Graphics

Photo

Improve the output result based on the content of the original document.

Content Source

Black and White Laser

Color Laser*

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Improve the output result based on the source of the original document.

Color

Black and White

Gray

Color*

Auto

Specify the color when scanning an image.

Resolution

75 dpi

150 dpi*

200 dpi

300 dpi

400 dpi

600 dpi

Set the resolution of the scanned image.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 131

Menu item Description

Darkness

-4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the darkness of the scanned image.

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.

Original Size

[List of paper sizes]

Set the paper size of the original document.

Notes:

•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory

default setting.

•The menu items may vary depending on your printer model.

Sides

O*

Long Edge

Short Edge

Specify the page orientation of text and graphics when scanning a two‑sided

document.

File Name Specify the ﬁle name of the scanned image.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Advanced Imaging

Menu item Description

Color Balance

-4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the amount of toner used for each color in scan output.

Color Dropout

None*

Red

Green

Blue

Default Red Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Default Green Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Default Blue Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Specify which color to drop during scanning, and adjust the dropout setting for

that color.

Auto Color Detect

Color Sensitivity

1–9 (5*)

Area Sensitivity

1–9 (5*)

Set the amount of color that the printer detects from the original document.

Note: This menu item appears only when Color is set to Auto.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 132

Menu item Description

JPEG Quality

Best for content*

5–95

Set the quality of a JPEG‑format image.

Notes:

•5 reduces the ﬁle size, but lessens the image quality.

•90 provides the best image quality, but produces a large ﬁle size.

Contrast

Best for content*

Specify the contrast of the output.

Background Removal

Background Detection

Content‑based*

Fixed

Level

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.

Note: If you want to remove the background color from the original

document, then set Background Detection to Content-based. If you want to

remove image noise from a photo, then set Background Detection to Fixed.

Mirror Image

O*

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Negative Image

O*

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Scan Edge to Edge

O*

Allow edge‑to‑edge scanning of the original document.

Sharpness

1–5 (3*)

Adjust the sharpness of a scanned image.

Tem perature

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Specify whether to generate a cooler or warmer output.

Blank Pages

Blank Page Removal

Blank Page Sensitivity

Specify whether to include blank pages.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 133

Admin Controls

Menu item Description

Tex t Defau lt

5–95 (75*)

Set the quality of text on a scanned image.

Tex t/Phot o Default

5–95 (75*)

Set the quality of text or photo image on a scanned image.

Photo Default

5–95 (50*)

Set the quality of a photo image on a scanned image.

Use Multi‑Page TIFF

On*

O

Choose between single- and multiple‑page TIFF ﬁles.

TIFF Compression

LZW*

JPEG

Set a compression option for TIFF ﬁles.

Transmission Log

Print Log*

Do Not Print Log

Print Only For Error

Print a log for successful FTP scan transmission.

Log Paper Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Multipurpose Feeder

Specify the paper source for printing FTP logs.

FTP Bit Depth

1 bit

8 bit*

Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller ﬁle sizes by using 1‑bit image.

Note: This menu item appears only when Color is set to Gray.

Custom Job Scanning

O*

Turn on scanning of custom jobs by default.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Scan Preview

O

On*

Show a preview of the scan on the display.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Allow Save as Shortcut

O

On*

Save custom FTP settings as shortcuts.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 134

USB Drive

Flash Drive Scan

Menu item Description

Format

PDF (.pdf)*

TIFF (.tif)

JPEG (.jpg)

XPS (.xps)

Specify the ﬁle format for the scanned image.

Note: The settings may vary depending on your printer model.

Global OCR Settings

Recognized Languages

Auto Rotate

Despeckle

Auto Contrast Enhance

Conﬁgure the settings for optical character recognition (OCR).

Note: This menu appears only if you have purchased and installed an OCR

solution.

PDF Settings

PDF Version

1.3

1.4

1.5*

1.6

1.7

Archival Version

A‑1a*

A‑1b

Secure

O*

Archival (PDF/A)

O*

Set the PDF format for the scanned image.

Content Type

Text

Text / Ph o t o*

Graphics

Photo

Improve the output result based on the content of the original document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 135

Menu item Description

Content Source

Black and White Laser

Color Laser*

Inkjet

Photo/Film

Magazine

Newspaper

Press

Other

Improve the output result based on the source of the original document.

Color

Black and White

Gray

Color*

Auto

Specify the color when scanning an image.

Resolution

75 dpi

150 dpi*

200 dpi

300 dpi

400 dpi

600 dpi

Set the resolution of the scanned image.

Darkness

1–9 (5*)

Adjust the darkness of the scanned image.

Orientation

Portrait*

Landscape

Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.

Original Size

[List of paper sizes]

Set the paper size of the original document.

Notes:

•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory

default setting.

•This menu item may vary depending on your printer model.

Sides

O*

Long edge

Short edge

Specify the page orientation of text and graphics when scanning a two‑sided

document.

File Name Specify the ﬁle name of the scanned image.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 136

Advanced Imaging

Menu item Description

Color Balance Adjust the amount of toner used for each color.

Color Dropout

None*

Red

Green

Blue

Default Red Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Default Green Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Default Blue Threshold

0–255 (128*)

Specify which color to drop during scanning, and adjust the dropout setting for

that color.

Auto Color Detect

Color Sensitivity

1–9 (5*)

Area Sensitivity

1–9 (5*)

Set the amount of color that the printer detects from the original document.

Note: This menu item appears only when Color is set to Auto.

JPEG Quality

Best for content*

5–95

Set the quality of a JPEG‑format image.

Notes:

•5 reduces the ﬁle size, but lessens the image quality.

•90 provides the best image quality, but produces a large ﬁle size.

Contrast

Best for content*

Specify the contrast of the output.

Background Removal

Background Detection

Content‑based*

Fixed

Level

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.

Note: If you want to remove the background color from the original

document, then set Background Detection to Content-based. If you want to

remove image noise from a photo, then set Background Detection to Fixed.

Mirror Image

O*

Create a mirror image of the original document.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 137

Menu item Description

Negative Image

O*

Create a negative image of the original document.

Shadow Detail

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.

Scan Edge to Edge

O*

Allow edge‑to‑edge scanning of the original document.

Sharpness

1–5 (3*)

Adjust the sharpness of a scanned image.

Tem perature

‑4 to 4 (0*)

Specify whether to generate a cooler or warmer output.

Blank Pages

Blank Page Removal

Blank Page Sensitivity

Specify whether to include blank pages.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Admin Controls

Menu item Description

Tex t Defau lt

5–95 (75*)

Set the quality of text on a scanned image.

Tex t/Phot o Default

5–95 (75*)

Set the quality of text or photo on a scanned image.

Photo Default

5–95 (75*)

Set the quality of a photo on a scanned image.

Use Multi‑Page TIFF

On*

O

Choose between single- and multiple‑page TIFF ﬁles.

TIFF Compression

LZW*

JPEG

Set the compression for TIFF ﬁles.

Scan Bit Depth

1 bit

8 bit*

Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller ﬁle sizes by using 1‑bit image.

Note: This menu item appears only when Color is set to Gray.

Custom Job Scanning

O*

Turn on scanning of custom jobs by default.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 138

Menu item Description

Scan Preview

O

On*

Show a preview of the scan on the display.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Flash Drive Print

Menu item Description

Number of Copies

1–9999 (1*)

Set the number of copies.

Paper Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Multipurpose Feeder

Manual Paper

Manual Envelope

Set the paper source for the print job.

Note: The multipurpose feeder is available only in some printer models.

Color

O

On*

Print the output in color.

Collate

(1,1,1) (2,2,2)

(1,2,3) (1,2,3)*

Print multiple copies in sequence.

Sides

1‑Sided*

2‑Sided

Specify whether to print on one side or two sides of the paper.

Flip Style

Long Edge*

Short Edge

Determine which side of the paper (long edge or short edge) is bound when

performing two‑sided printing.

Note: Depending on the option selected, the printer automatically osets each

printed information of the page to bind the job correctly.

Pages per Side

O*

2 pages per side

3 pages per side

4 pages per side

6 pages per side

9 pages per side

12 pages per side

16 pages per side

Print multiple page images on one side of a sheet of paper.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 139

Menu item Description

Pages per Side Ordering

Horizontal*

Reverse Horizontal

Reverse Vertical

Vertical

Specify the positioning of multiple page images when using Pages per Side.

Note: The positioning depends on the number of page images and their page

orientation.

Pages per Side Orientation

Auto*

Landscape

Portrait

Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document when using Pages per Side.

Pages per Side Border

None*

Solid

Print a border around each page image when using Pages per Side.

Separator Sheets

O*

Between Copies

Between Jobs

Between Pages

Specify whether to insert blank separator sheets when printing.

Separator Sheet Source

Tray [x] (1*)

Multipurpose Feeder

Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.

Note: The multipurpose feeder is available only in some printer models.

Blank Pages

Do Not Print*

Specify whether to print blank pages in a print job.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Network/Ports

Network Overview

Menu item Description

Active Adapter

Auto*

Standard Network

Wireless

Specify the type of the network connection.

Note: Wireless is available only in printers connected to a wireless network.

Network Status Show the connectivity status of the printer network.

Display Network Status on

Printer

O

On*

Show the network status on the display.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 140

Menu item Description

Speed, Duplex Show the speed of the currently active network card.

IPv4 Show the IPv4 address.

All IPv6 Addresses Show all IPv6 addresses.

Reset Print Server Reset all active network connections to the printer.

Note: This setting removes all network conﬁguration settings.

Network Job Timeout

O

On* (90 seconds)

Set the time before the printer cancels a network print job.

Banner Page

O*

Print a banner page.

Scan to PC Port Range Specify a valid port range for printers that are behind a port blocking ﬁrewall.

Enable Network Connections

O

On*

Enable the printer to connect to a network.

Enable LLDP

O*

Enable Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) in the printer.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Wireless

Menu item Description

Setup Using Mobile App Conﬁgure the wireless connection using the Lexmark Mobile

Assistant app.

Setup On Printer Panel

Choose Network

Add Wi‑Fi Network

•Network Name

•Network Mode

•Wireless Security Mode (Disabled*)

Determine the wireless network that the printer connects to.

Note: This menu item appears as Wireless Connection Setup in the

Embedded Web Server.

Wi‑Fi Protected Setup

Start Push Button Method

Start PIN Method

Establish a wireless network and enable network security.

Notes:

•Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless

network when buttons on both the printer and the access point

(wireless router) are pressed within a given time.

•Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network

when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings

of the access point.

Understanding the printer menus 141

Menu item Description

Compatibility

802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz)*

Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.

Wireless Security Mode

Disabled*

WEP

WPA2/WPA-Personal

WPA2-Personal

802.1x - RADIUS

Set the type of security for connecting the printer to wireless devices.

WEP Authentication Mode

Auto*

Open

Shared

Set the type of Wireless Encryption Protocol (WEP) used by the

printer.

Note: This menu item appears only if Wireless Security Mode is set

to WEP.

Set WEP Key Specify a WEP password for secure wireless connection.

Note: This menu item appears only if Wireless Security Mode is set

to WEP.

WPA2-Personal

AES*

Enable wireless security through WPA2.

Note: This menu item appears only if Wireless Security Mode is set

to WPA2-Personal.

Set PSK Set the password for secure wireless connection.

Note: This menu item appears only if Wireless Security Mode is set

to WPA2/WPA-Personal or WPA2‑Personal.

WPA2/WPA‑Personal

AES*

Enable wireless security through WPA2/WPA.

Note: This menu item appears only if Wireless Security Mode is set

to WPA2/WPA-Personal.

802.1x Encryption Mode

WPA+

WPA2*

Enable wireless security through 802.1x standard.

Note: This menu item appears only if Wireless Security Mode is set

to 802.1x - Radius.

IPv4

Enable DHCP

On*

O

Enable Dynamic Host Conﬁguration Protocol (DHCP).

Note: DHCP is a standard protocol that lets a server dynamically

assign an IP address and other network conﬁguration parameters

to each device on the network, so that they can communicate with

other IP networks.

IPv4

Set Static IP Address

IP Address

Netmask

Gateway

Set the static IP address of your printer.

IPv6

Enable IPv6

On*

O

Enable IPv6 in the printer.

Understanding the printer menus 142

Menu item Description

IPv6

Enable DHCPv6

O*

Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.

IPv6

Stateless Address Autoconﬁguration

O

On*

Set the network adapter to accept the automatic IPv6 address

conﬁguration entries provided by a router.

IPv6

DNS Address

Specify the DNS server address.

IPv6

Manually Assigned IPV6

Assign the IPv6 address.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

IPv6

Manually Assigned IPV6 Router

Assign the IPv6 router address.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

IPv6

Address Preﬁx

0–128 (64*)

Specify the address preﬁx.

IPv6

All IPv6 Addresses

Show all IPv6 addresses.

IPv6

All IPv6 Router Addresses

Show all IPv6 router addresses.

Network Address

UAA

LAA

View the network addresses.

PCL SmartSwitch

On*

O

Set the printer to switch automatically to PCL emulation when a print

job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Note: If PCL SmartSwitch is o, then the printer does not examine

incoming data and uses the default printer language speciﬁed in

the Setup menu.

PS SmartSwitch

On*

O*

Set the printer to switch automatically to PS emulation when a print

job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Notes:

•This menu item appears only in some printer models.

•If PS SmartSwitch is o, then the printer does not examine

incoming data and uses the default printer language speciﬁed

in the Setup menu.

Understanding the printer menus 143

Menu item Description

Mac Binary PS

Auto*

O

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.

Notes:

•This menu item appears only in some printer models.

•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.

•O ﬁlters print jobs using the standard protocol.

Wi‑Fi Direct

Menu item Description

Enable Wi‑Fi Direct

O*

Set the printer to connect directly to Wi-Fi devices.

Wi‑Fi Direct Name Specify the name of the Wi‑Fi Direct network.

Wi‑Fi Direct Password Set the password to authenticate and validate users on a Wi‑Fi connection.

Show Password on Setup Page

O

On*

Show the Wi‑Fi Direct Password on the Network Setup Page.

Preferred Channel Number

1–11

Auto*

Set the preferred channel of the Wi‑Fi network.

Group Owner IP Address Specify the IP address of the group owner.

Auto‑Accept Push Button

Requests

O*

Accept requests to connect to the network automatically.

Note: Accepting clients automatically is not secured.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Ethernet

Menu item Description

Network Speed Show the speed of the active network adapter.

IPv4

Enable DHCP (On*)

Set Static IP Address

Conﬁgure the IPv4 settings.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 144

Menu item Description

IPv6

Enable IPv6 (On*)

Enable DHCPv6 (O*)

Stateless Address Autoconﬁguration (On*)

DNS Server Address

Manually Assigned IPv6 Address

Manually Assigned IPv6 Router

Address Preﬁx (64*)

All IPv6 Addresses

All IPv6 Router Addresses

Conﬁgure the IPv6 settings.

Network Address

UAA

LAA

Specify the network address.

PCL SmartSwitch

O

On*

Set the printer to switch automatically to PCL emulation when a print

job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Note: When this setting is disabled, the printer does not examine

incoming data and uses the default printer language speciﬁed in

the Setup menu.

PS SmartSwitch

O

On*

Set the printer to switch automatically to PostScript emulation when

a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Note: When this setting is disabled, the printer does not examine

incoming data and uses the default printer language speciﬁed in

the Setup menu.

Job Buering

O*

Temporarily store jobs on the hard disk before printing.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Mac Binary PS

Auto*

O

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.

Notes:

•Auto processes print jobs from computers using either

Windows or Macintosh operating systems.

•O ﬁlters PostScript print jobs using the standard protocol.

Energy Ecient Ethernet

O

Auto*

Reduce power consumption when the printer does not receive data

from the Ethernet network.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

TCP/IP

Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.

Understanding the printer menus 145

Menu item Description

Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP host name.

Domain Name Set the domain name.

Allow DHCP/BOOTP to update

NTP server

On*

O

Allow the DHCP and BOOTP clients to update the NTP settings of the printer.

Zero Conﬁguration Name Specify a service name for the zero conﬁguration network.

Enable Auto IP

O*

Assign an IP address automatically.

DNS Server Address Specify the current Domain Name System (DNS) server address.

Backup DNS Address Specify the backup DNS server addresses.

Backup DNS Address 2

Backup DNS Address 3

Domain Search Order Specify a list of domain names to locate the printer and its resources that reside

in dierent domains on the network.

Enable DDNS

O*

Update the Dynamic DNS settings.

DDNS TTL Specify the current DDNS settings.

Default TTL

DDNS Refresh Time

Enable mDNS

O

On*

Update the multicast DNS settings.

WINS Server Address Specify a server address for Windows Internet Name Service (WINS).

Enable BOOTP

O*

Allow the BOOTP to assign a printer IP address.

Restricted Server List Specify the IP addresses that are allowed to communicate with the printer over

TCP/IP.

Notes:

•Use a comma to separate each IP address.

•You can add up to 50 IP addresses.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 146

Menu item Description

Restricted Server List Options

Block All Ports*

Block Printing Only

Block Printing and HTTP Only

Specify the access option for IP addresses that are not in the list.

MTU

256–1500 Ethernet (1500*)

Specify a maximum transmission unit (MTU) parameter for the TCP connections.

Raw Print Port

1–65535 (9100*)

Specify a raw port number for printers connected on a network.

Outbound Trac Maximum

Speed

O*

Set the maximum transfer rate of the printer.

Note: When enabled, the option for this setting is 100–1000000

Kilobits/second.

Enable TLSv1.0

O

On*

Enable the TLSv1.0 protocol.

Enable TLSv1.1

O

On*

Enable the TLSv1.1 protocol.

SSL Cipher List Specify the cipher algorithms to use for the SSL or the TLS connections.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

SNMP

Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.

Menu item Description

SNMP Versions 1 and 2c

Enabled

O

On*

Allow SNMP Set

O

On*

Enable PPM MIB

O

On*

SNMP Community

Conﬁgure Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) versions 1

and 2c to install print drivers and applications.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 147

Menu item Description

SNMP Version 3

Enabled

O

On*

Set Read/Write Credentials

User Name

Password

Set Read‑only Credentials

User Name

Password

Authentication Hash

MD5

SHA1*

Minimum Authentication Level

No Authentication, No Privacy

Authentication, No Privacy

Authentication, Privacy*

Privacy Algorithm

DES

AES‑128*

Conﬁgure SNMP version 3 to install and update the printer security.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

IPSec

Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.

Menu item Description

Enable IPSec

O*

Enable Internet Protocol Security (IPSec).

Base Conﬁguration

Default*

Compatibility

Secure

Set the IPSec base conﬁguration.

Note: This menu item appears only when Enable IPSec is set to

On.

IPSec Device Certiﬁcate Specify an IPSec certiﬁcate.

Note: This menu item appears only when Base Conﬁguration is set

to Compatibility.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 148

Menu item Description

Pre‑Shared Key Authenticated

Connections

Host [x]

Address

Key

Conﬁgure the authenticated connections of the printer.

Note: These menu items appear only when Enable IPSec is set to

On.

Certiﬁcate Authenticated Connections

Host [x] Address[/subnet]

Address[/subnet]

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

802.1x

Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.

Menu item Description

Active

O*

Let the printer join networks that require authentication before

allowing access.

Note: To conﬁgure the settings of this menu item, access the

Embedded Web Server.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

LPD Conﬁguration

Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.

Menu item Description

LPD Timeout

0–65535 seconds (90*)

Set the time‑out value to stop the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) server

from waiting indeﬁnitely for hung or invalid print jobs.

LPD Banner Page

O*

Print a banner page for all LPD print jobs.

Note: A banner page is the ﬁrst page of a print job used as a

separator of print jobs and to identify the originator of the print job

request.

LPD Trailer Page

O*

Print a trailer page for all LPD print jobs.

Note: A trailer page is the last page of a print job.

LPD Carriage Return Conversion

O*

Enable carriage return conversion.

Note: Carriage return is a mechanism that commands the printer to

move the position of the cursor to the ﬁrst position on the same

line.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 149

HTTP/FTP Settings

Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.

Menu item Description

Enable HTTP Server

O

On*

Access the Embedded Web Server to monitor and manage the printer.

Enable HTTPS

O

On*

Conﬁgure the Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS) settings.

Enable FTP/TFTP

O

On*

Send ﬁles using FTP.

Local Domains Specify domain names for HTTP and FTP servers.

Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.

HTTP Proxy IP Address Conﬁgure the HTTP and FTP server settings.

Note: These menu items appear only in some printer models.

FTP Proxy IP Address

HTTP Default IP Port

1–65535 (80*)

HTTPS Device Certiﬁcate

FTP Default IP Port

1–65535 (21*)

Timeout for HTTP/FTP

Requests

1–299 (30*)

Specify the amount of time before the server connection stops.

Retries for HTTP/FTP Requests

1–299 (3*)

Set the number of retries to connect to the HTTP/FTP server.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

ThinPrint

Menu item Description

Enable ThinPrint

O

On*

Print using ThinPrint.

Port Number

4000–4999 (4000*)

Set the port number for the ThinPrint server.

Bandwidth (bits/sec)

100–1000000 (0*)

Set the speed to transmit data in a ThinPrint environment.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 150

Menu item Description

Packet Size (kbytes)

0–64000 (0*)

Set the packet size for data transmission.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

USB

Menu item Description

PCL SmartSwitch

O

On*

Set the printer to switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a

USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Note: If PCL SmartSwitch is o, then the printer does not examine incoming

data and uses the default printer language speciﬁed in the Setup menu.

PS SmartSwitch

O

On*

Set the printer to switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a

USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.

Note: If PS SmartSwitch is o, then the printer does not examine incoming

data and uses the default printer language speciﬁed in the Setup menu.

Job Buering

O*

Temporarily store jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.

Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk installed.

Mac Binary PS

Auto*

O

Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.

Notes:

•When set to On, the printer processes raw binary PostScript print jobs

from computers using the Macintosh operating system.

•When set to Auto, the printer processes print jobs from computers using

either Windows or Macintosh operating systems

•When set to O, the printer ﬁlters PostScript print jobs using the standard

protocol.

Enable USB Port

O

On*

Enable the standard USB port.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Restrict external network access

Menu item Description

Restrict external network

access

O*

Restrict access to network sites.

External network address Specify the network addresses with restricted access.

E‑mail address for notiﬁcation Specify an e‑mail address to send a notiﬁcation of logged events.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 151

Menu item Description

Ping frequency

1–300 (10*)

Specify the network query interval in seconds.

Subject Specify the subject and message of the notiﬁcation e‑mail.

Message

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 152

Security

Manage Permissions

Menu item Description

Function Access

Access Address Book in Apps

Modify Address Book

Manage Shortcuts

Create Proﬁles

Manage Bookmarks

Flash Drive Print

Flash Drive Color Printing

Flash Drive Scan

Copy Function

Copy Color Printing

Color Dropout

E‑mail Function

Fax Function

FTP Function

Release Held Faxes

Held Jobs Access

Use Proﬁles

Cancel Jobs at the Device

Change Language

Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)

Initiate Scans Remotely

B/W Print

Color Print

Network Folder ‑ Print

Network Folder ‑ Color Print

Network Folder ‑ Scan

Hard Disk ‑ Print

Hard Disk ‑ Color Print

Hard Disk ‑ Scan

Control access to the printer functions.

Note: Some menu items appear only when a hard disk is installed.

Understanding the printer menus 153

Menu item Description

Administrative Menus

Security Menu

Network/Ports Menu

Paper Menu

Reports Menu

Function Conﬁguration Menus

Supplies Menu

Option Card Menu

SE Menu

Device Menu

Control access to the printer menu settings.

Device Management

Remote Management

Firmware Updates

Apps Conﬁguration

Operator Panel Lock

Import / Export All Settings

Out of Service Erase

Control access to the printer management options.

Apps

New Apps

Card Copy

Scan Center

Scan Center Custom [x]

Forms and Favorites

Control access to printer applications.

Local Accounts

Menu item Description

Manage Groups/Permissions

Add Group

Import Access Controls

Function Access

Administrative Menus

Device Management

Apps

All Users

Import Access Controls

Function Access

Administrative Menus

Device Management

Apps

Admin

Control group or user access to the printer functions, applications, and security

settings.

Understanding the printer menus 154

Menu item Description

Add User

User Name/Password

User Name

Password

Create local accounts to manage access to the printer functions.

User Name/Password Accounts

Add User

User Name Accounts

Add User

Password Accounts

Add User

PIN Accounts

Add User

Schedule USB Devices

Menu item Description

Schedules

Add New Schedule

Schedule access to the USB ports.

Security Audit Log

Menu item Description

Enable Audit

O*

Record the events in the secure audit log and remote syslog.

Enable Remote Syslog

O*

Send audit logs to a remote server.

Remote Syslog Server Specify the remote syslog server.

Remote Syslog Port

1–65535 (514*)

Specify the remote syslog port.

Remote Syslog Method

Normal UDP*

Stunnel

Specify a syslog method to transmit logged events to a remote server.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 155

Menu item Description

Remote Syslog Facility

0 ‑ Kernel Messages

1 ‑ User‑Level Messages

2 ‑ Mail System

3 ‑ System Daemons

4 ‑ Security/Authorization

Messages*

5 ‑ Messages Generated

Internally by Syslogs

6 ‑ Line Printer Subsystem

7 ‑ Network News Subsystem

8 ‑ UUCP Subsystem

9 ‑ Clock Daemon

10 ‑ Security/Authorization

Messages

11 ‑ FTP Daemon

12 ‑ NTP Subsystem

13 ‑ Log Audit

14 ‑ Log Alert

15 ‑ Clock Daemon

16 ‑ Local Use 0 (local0)

17‑ Local Use 1 (local1)

18 ‑ Local Use 2 (local2)

19 ‑ Local Use 3 (local3)

20 ‑ Local Use 4 (local4)

21 ‑ Local Use 5 (local5)

22 ‑ Local Use 6 (local6)

23 ‑ Local Use 7 (local7)

Specify a facility code that the printer uses when sending log events to a remote

server.

Severity of Events to Log

0 ‑ Emergency

1 ‑ Alert

2 ‑ Critical

3 ‑ Error

4 ‑ Warning*

5 ‑ Notice

6 ‑ Informational

7 ‑ Debug

Specify the priority level cuto for logging messages and events.

Remote Syslog Non‑Logged

Events

O*

Send all events, regardless of severity level, to the remote server.

Admin’s E‑mail Address Send e‑mail notiﬁcation of logged events to the administrator.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 156

Menu item Description

E‑mail Log Cleared Alert

O*

Send e‑mail notiﬁcation to the administrator when a log entry is deleted.

E‑mail Log Wrapped Alert

O*

Send e‑mail notiﬁcation to the administrator when the log becomes full and

begins to overwrite the oldest entries.

Log Full Behavior

Wrap Over Older Entries*

E‑mail Log Then Delete All

Entries

Resolve log storage issues when the log ﬁlls its allotted memory.

E‑mail % Full Alert

O*

Send e‑mail notiﬁcation to the administrator when the log ﬁlls its allotted

memory.

% Full Alert Level

1–99 (90*)

E‑mail Log Exported Alert

O*

Send e‑mail notiﬁcation to the administrator when a log is exported.

E‑mail Log Settings Changed

Alert

O*

Send e‑mail notiﬁcation to the administrator when Enable Audit is set.

Log Line Endings

LF (\n)*

CR (\r)

CRLF (\r\n)

Specify how the log ﬁle terminates the end of each line.

Digitally Sign Exports

O*

Add a digital signature to each exported log ﬁle.

Clear Log Delete all audit logs.

Export Log

Syslog (RFC 5424)

Syslog (RFC 3164)

CSV

Export a security log to a ﬂash drive.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 157

Menu item Description

1–10 (3*)

Specify the number of failed login attempts before the user gets locked out.

Failure time frame

1–60 minutes (5*)

Specify the time frame between failed login attempts before the user gets locked out.

Lockout time

1–60 minutes (5*)

Specify the lockout duration.

Web Login Timeout

1–120 minutes (10*)

Specify the delay for a remote login before the user is logged o automatically.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Conﬁdential Print Setup

Menu item Description

Max Invalid PIN

2–10

Set the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.

Notes:

•A value of zero turns o this setting.

•When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are

deleted.

•This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.

Conﬁdential Job Expiration

O*

1 Hour

4 Hours

24 Hours

1 Week

Set the expiration time for conﬁdential print jobs.

Notes:

•If this menu item is changed while conﬁdential print jobs reside in the printer

memory or hard disk, then the expiration time for those print jobs does not

change to the new default value.

•If the printer is turned o, then all conﬁdential jobs held in the printer memory

are deleted.

Repeat Job Expiration

O*

1 Hour

4 Hours

24 Hours

1 Week

Set the expiration time for a print job that you want to repeat.

Verify Job Expiration

O*

1 Hour

4 Hours

24 Hours

1 Week

Set the expiration time that the printer prints a copy for the user to examine its quality,

before printing the remaining copies.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 158

Menu item Description

Reserve Job Expiration

O*

1 Hour

4 Hours

24 Hours

1 Week

Set the expiration time that the printer stores print jobs for printing later.

Require All Jobs to be Held

O*

Set the printer to hold all print jobs.

Keep duplicate documents

O*

Set the printer to print other documents with the same ﬁle name without overwriting

any of the print jobs.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Disk Encryption

Note: This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.

Menu item Description

Status

Enabled

Disabled

Determine whether Disk Encryption is enabled.

Start encryption Prevent the loss of sensitive data in case the printer or its hard disk is stolen.

Note: Enabling disk encryption erases all contents in the hard disk. If necessary, back up

important data from the printer before starting the encryption.

Erase Temporary Data Files

Menu item Description

Stored in onboard memory

O*

Delete all ﬁles stored on the printer memory.

Stored on hard disk

1 Pass Erase*

3 Pass Erase

7 Pass Erase

Delete all ﬁles stored on the printer hard disk.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Understanding the printer menus 159

Solutions LDAP Settings

Use To

Follow LDAP Referrals

O*

Search the dierent servers in the domain for the logged-in user account.

LDAP Certiﬁcate Veriﬁcation

No*

Ye s

Enable veriﬁcation of LDAP certiﬁcates.

Miscellaneous

Menu item Description

Protected Features

Show*

Hide

Show all the features that Function Access Control (FAC) protects regardless

of the security permission that the user has.

Note: FAC manages access to speciﬁc menus and functions or disables them

entirely.

Print Permission

O*

Let the user log in before printing.

Default Print Permission Login Set the default login for Print Permission.

Security Reset Jumper

Enable “Guest” access*

No Eect

Specify the eect of using the security reset jumper.

Notes:

•The jumper is located beside a lock icon on the controller board.

•Enable “Guest” access provides full access control to users who are not

logged in.

•No Eect means that the reset has no eect on the printer security

conﬁguration.

Minimum Password Length

0–32 (0*)

Specify the minimum characters that are allowed for a password.

Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Reports

Menu Settings Page

Menu item Description

Menu Settings Page Print a report that contains the printer preferences, settings, and conﬁgurations.

Understanding the printer menus 160

Device

Menu item Description

Device Information Print a report that contains information about the printer.

Device Statistics Print a report about printer usage and supply status.

Proﬁle List Print a list of proﬁles that are stored in the printer.

Asset Report Print a report that contains the printer serial number and model name.

Menu item Description

Print Fonts

PCL Fonts

PS Fonts

Print samples and information about the fonts that are available in each printer

language.

Print Directory Print the resources that are stored in the ﬂash drive or printer hard disk.

Note: This menu item appears only when a ﬂash drive or printer hard disk is

installed.

Shortcuts

Menu item Description

All Shortcuts Print a report that lists the shortcuts that are stored in the printer.

Fax Shortcuts

Copy Shortcuts

E‑mail Shortcuts

FTP Shortcuts

Network Folder Shortcuts

Fax

Note: This menu appears only if Fax is conﬁgured, and Enable Job Log is set to On.

Menu item Description

Fax Job Log Print a report about the last 200 completed fax jobs.

Fax Call Log Print a report about the last 100 attempted, received, and blocked calls.

Understanding the printer menus 161

Network

Menu item Description

Network Setup Page Print a page that shows the conﬁgured network and wireless settings on the

printer.

Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected

to print servers.

Help

Menu item Description

Print All Guides Prints all the guides

Color Quality Guide Provides information about solving color quality issues

Connection Guide Provides information about connecting the printer locally (USB) or to a network

Copy Guide Provides information about making a copy and conﬁguring the settings

E‑mail Guide Provides information about sending an e‑mail and conﬁguring the settings

Fax Guide Provides information about sending a fax and conﬁguring the settings

Scan Guide Provides information about scanning a document and conﬁguring the settings

Information Guide Provides information about the printer

Media Guide Provides information about loading paper and specialty media

Moving Guide Provides information about moving, locating, or shipping the printer

Print Quality Guide Provides information about solving print quality issues

Supplies Guide Provides information about ordering supplies

Troubleshooting

Menu item Description

Print Quality Test Pages Print sample pages to identify and correct print quality defects.

Cleaning the Scanner Print instructions on how to clean the scanner.

Printing the Menu Settings Page

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Reports > Menu Settings Page

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

Understanding the printer menus 162

Securing the printer

Note: The hard disk is supported only in some printer models.

Locating the security slot

The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. Attach a security lock compatible with most laptop

computers in the location shown to secure the printer in place.

Erasing printer memory

To erase volatile memory or buered data, turn o the printer.

To e r a se no n‑volatile memory or individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and

embedded solutions, do the following:

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Maintenance > Out of Service Erase > Sanitize all information on nonvolatile memory

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Select either Start initial setup or Leave printer oine.

Securing the printer 163

Erasing printer hard disk memory

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Maintenance > Out of Service Erase > Sanitize all information on hard disk

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Depending on your printer model, select ERASE or Continue.

3Follow the instructions on the display.

Note: This process can take from several minutes to more than an hour, making the printer unavailable

for other tasks.

Encrypting the printer hard disk

This process erases all contents in the hard disk. If necessary, back up important data from the printer before

starting the encryption.

1From the home screen, touch Settings > Security > Disk Encryption > Start encryption.

2Follow the instructions on the display.

Notes:

•To avoid loss of data, do not turn o the printer during the encryption process.

•This process can take from several minutes to more than an hour, making the printer unavailable for

other tasks.

•After encryption, the printer automatically restarts.

Restoring factory default settings

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Restore Factory Defaults

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Select Restore all settings.

Statement of Volatility

Type of memory Description

Volatile memory The printer uses standard random access memory (RAM)

to buer temporarily user data during simple print and

copy jobs.

Non-volatile memory The printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:

EEPROM and NAND (ﬂash memory). Both types are used

to store the operating system, printer settings, network

information, scanner and bookmark settings, and

embedded solutions.

Securing the printer 164

Type of memory Description

Hard disk memory Some printers may have a hard disk drive installed. The

printer hard disk is designed for printer-speciﬁc

functionality. The hard disk lets the printer retain buered

user data from complex print jobs, form data, and font

data.

Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:

•The printer is decommissioned.

•The printer hard disk is replaced.

•The printer is moved to a dierent department or location.

•The printer is serviced by someone from outside your organization.

•The printer is removed from your premises for service.

•The printer is sold to another organization.

Disposing of a printer hard disk

•Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic ﬁeld that erases stored data

•Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable

•Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits

Note: To guarantee that all data are completely erased, destroy physically each hard disk where data is

stored.

Securing the printer 165

Maintaining the printer

Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and

supplies, may cause damage to your printer.

Conﬁguring supply notiﬁcations

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Settings > Device > Notiﬁcations.

3From the Supplies menu, click Custom Supply Notiﬁcations.

4Select a notiﬁcation for each supply item.

5Apply the changes.

Setting up e‑mail alerts

Conﬁgure the printer to send e‑mail alerts when supplies are low, when paper must be changed or added, or

when there is a paper jam.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Settings > Device > Notiﬁcations > E‑mail Alert Setup, and then conﬁgure the settings.

Note: For more information on SMTP settings, contact your e‑mail provider.

3Click Setup E-mail Lists and Alerts, and then conﬁgure the settings.

4Apply the changes.

Viewing reports

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Reports

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Select the report that you want to view.

Maintaining the printer 166

Adjusting the speaker volume

Adjusting the default internal speaker volume

Note: The speaker is available only in some printer models.

1From the control panel, touch Settings > Device > Preferences > Audio Feedback.

2Adjust the volume.

Notes:

•If Quiet Mode is enabled, then audible alerts are turned o. This setting also slows the printer

performance.

•The volume resets to the default value after the session is logged out or when the printer wakes from

Sleep or Hibernate mode.

Adjusting the default headphone volume

Note: The headphone jack is available only in some printer models.

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Accessibility

2Adjust Headphone Volume.

Note: The volume resets to the default value after the session is logged out or when the printer wakes

from Sleep or Hibernate mode.

Conﬁguring the fax speaker settings

Note: Make sure that fax is conﬁgured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 61.

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Speaker Settings

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Do the following:

•Set Speaker Mode to Always On.

•Set Speaker Volume to High.

•Enable Ringer Volume.

Maintaining the printer 167

Networking

Connecting the printer to a Wi‑Fi network

Before you begin, make sure that:

•Active Adapter is set to Auto. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Network/Ports > Network

Overview > Active Adapter.

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

•The Ethernet cable is not connected to the printer.

Using the wireless setup wizard in the printer

Notes:

•These instructions apply only to some printer models.

•Before using the wizard, make sure that the printer ﬁrmware is updated. For more information, see

“Updating ﬁrmware” on page 274.

1From the home screen, touch > Set up now.

2Select a Wi‑Fi network, and then type the network password.

3Tou ch Done.

Using the Settings menu in the printer

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Setup On Printer Panel

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Select a Wi‑Fi network, and then type the network password.

Note: For Wi‑Fi‑network‑ready printer models, a prompt to set up the Wi‑Fi network appears during initial

setup.

Using Lexmark Mobile Assistant

1Depending on your mobile device, download the Lexmark Mobile Assistant app from either Google PlayTM

or App Store.

2Depending on your printer model, do one of the following:

•From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Setup Using Mobile App > Printer

ID.

•From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Setup Using Mobile App

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

Follow the instructions on the display to view the printer ID.

Note: The printer ID is the printer wireless network SSID.

Maintaining the printer 168

3From your mobile device, launch the app, and then accept the Terms of Use.

Note: If necessary, grant permissions.

4Tap Connect to Printer > Go to Wi‑Fi Settings.

5Connect your mobile device to the printer wireless network.

6Return to the app, and then tap Setup Wi-Fi Connection.

7Select a Wi-Fi network, and then type the network password.

8Tap Done.

Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup

(WPS)

Before you begin, make sure that:

•The access point (wireless router) is WPS‑certiﬁed or WPS‑compatible. For more information, see the

documentation that came with your access point.

•A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer. For more information, see the instructions that came

with the adapter.

•Active Adapter is set to Auto. From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Network/Ports > Network Overview > Active Adapter

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

Using the Push Button method

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start Push Button Method

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Follow the instructions on the display.

Using the personal identiﬁcation number (PIN) method

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start PIN Method

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.

3Open a web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•To know the IP address, see the documentation that came with your access point.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

4Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.

5Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the changes.

Maintaining the printer 169

Conﬁguring Wi‑Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct® is a Wi-Fi-based peer-to-peer technology that allows wireless devices to connect directly to a Wi-

Fi Direct‑enabled printer without using an access point (wireless router).

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Network/Ports > Wi-Fi Direct

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Conﬁgure the settings.

•Enable Wi‑Fi Direct—Enables the printer to broadcast its own Wi‑Fi Direct network.

•Wi‑Fi Direct Name—Assigns a name for the Wi‑Fi Direct network.

•Wi‑Fi Direct Password—Assigns the password for negotiating the wireless security when using the

peer‑to-peer connection.

•Show Password on Setup Page—Shows the password on the Network Setup Page.

•Auto-Accept Push Button Requests—Lets the printer accept connection requests automatically.

Note: Accepting push‑button requests automatically is not secured.

Notes:

•By default, the Wi-Fi Direct network password is not visible on the printer display. To show the password,

enable the password peek icon. From the control panel, navigate to Settings > Security > Miscellaneous

> Enable Password/PIN Reveal.

•To know the password of the Wi-Fi Direct network without showing it on the printer display, from the

control panel navigate to Settings > Reports > Network > Network Setup Page.

Connecting a mobile device to the printer

Before connecting your mobile device, make sure that Wi‑Fi Direct has been conﬁgured. For more information,

see “Conﬁguring Wi‑Fi Direct” on page 170.

Connecting using Wi‑Fi Direct

1From the mobile device, go to the settings menu.

2Enable Wi‑Fi, and then tap Wi‑Fi Direct.

3Select the printer Wi-Fi Direct name.

4Conﬁrm the connection on the printer control panel.

Connecting using Wi‑Fi

1From the mobile device, go to the settings menu.

2Tap Wi‑Fi, and then select the printer Wi-Fi Direct name.

Note: The string DIRECT-xy (where x and y are two random characters) is added before the Wi-Fi Direct

name.

3Enter the Wi-Fi Direct password.

Maintaining the printer 170

Connecting a computer to the printer

Before connecting your computer, make sure to do the following:

•Enable Wi‑Fi Direct in the printer. From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Network/Ports > Wi-Fi Direct > Enable Wi‑Fi Direct > On

•Take note of the Wi‑Fi Direct name. From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Network/Ports > Wi-Fi Direct > Wi-Fi Direct Name

•Take note of the Wi‑Fi Direct password. From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Network/Ports > Wi-Fi Direct > Wi-Fi Direct Password

Note: You can also conﬁgure the Wi‑Fi Direct name and password.

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

For Windows users

1Open Printers & scanners, and then click Add a printer or scanner.

2Click Show Wi-Fi Direct printers, and then select the printer Wi‑Fi Direct name.

3From the printer display, take note of the eight-digit PIN of the printer.

4Enter the PIN on the computer.

Note: If the print driver is not already installed, then Windows downloads the appropriate driver.

For Macintosh users

1Click the wireless icon, and then select the printer Wi‑Fi Direct name.

Note: The string DIRECT-xy (where x and y are two random characters) is added before the Wi-Fi Direct

name.

2Type the Wi‑Fi Direct password.

Note: Switch your computer back to its previous network after disconnecting from the Wi-Fi Direct

connection.

Deactivating the Wi‑Fi network

1From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Network/Ports > Network Overview > Active Adapter > Standard Networking

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Follow the instructions on the display.

Maintaining the printer 171

Changing the printer port settings after installing an internal solutions port

Notes:

•If the printer has a static IP address, then do not change the conﬁguration.

•If the computers are conﬁgured to use the network name instead of an IP address, then do not change

the conﬁguration.

•If you are adding a wireless internal solutions port (ISP) to a printer previously conﬁgured for an Ethernet

connection, then disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network.

For Windows users

1Open the printers folder.

2From the shortcut menu of the printer with the new ISP, open the printer properties.

3Conﬁgure the port from the list.

4Update the IP address.

5Apply the changes.

For Macintosh users

1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to the list of printers, and then select + > IP.

2Type the IP address in the address ﬁeld.

3Apply the changes.

Cleaning printer parts

Cleaning the printer

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the

printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before

proceeding.

Notes:

•Perform this task after every few months.

•Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty.

1Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

2Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.

3Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.

4Wipe the outside of the printer with a damp, soft, lint‑free cloth.

Notes:

•Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the ﬁnish of the printer.

Maintaining the printer 172

•Make sure that all areas of the printer are dry after cleaning.

5Connect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

Cleaning the scanner

1Open the scanner cover.

2Using a damp, soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the following areas:

•ADF glass

Maintaining the printer 173

•ADF glass pad

•Scanner glass

•Scanner glass pad

3Close the scanner cover.

If your printer has another ADF glass inside door C, then continue with the following steps.

Maintaining the printer 174

4Open door C.

5Using a damp, soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the following areas:

•ADF glass pad in door C

•ADF glass in door C

6Close the door.

Cleaning the touch screen

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the

printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before

proceeding.

1Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

2Using a damp, soft, lint‑free cloth, wipe the touch screen.

Maintaining the printer 175

Notes:

•Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the touch screen.

•Make sure that the touch screen is dry after cleaning.

3Connect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

Ordering parts and supplies

To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized

dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you

purchased the printer.

Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.

Checking the status of parts and supplies

1From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies.

2Select the parts or supplies that you want to check.

Note: You can also access this setting by touching the top section of the home screen.

Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies

Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark parts and supplies. Use of third-party

supplies or parts may aect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. It can

also aect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party parts and supplies is not covered by

the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark parts and supplies, and may deliver

unpredictable results if third-party parts and supplies are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended

life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.

Ordering a toner cartridge

Notes:

•The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19798 standard.

•Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively aect actual yield.

Maintaining the printer 176

Lexmark CX421, CX522, CX622, and CX625 Return Program toner cartridges

Item United States

and Canada

European

Economic

Area

Rest of Asia

Paciﬁc

Latin America Rest of

Europe,

Middle East,

and Africa

Australia and

New Zealand

Return Program toner cartridges

Cyan 78C10C0 78C20C0 78C30C0 78C40C0 78C50C0 78C60C0

Magenta 78C10M0 78C20M0 78C30M0 78C40M0 78C50M0 78C60M0

Yellow 78C10Y0 78C20Y0 78C30Y0 78C40Y0 78C50Y0 78C60Y0

Black 78C10K0 78C20K0 78C30K0 78C40K0 78C50K0 78C60K0

Extra high yield Return Program toner cartridges1

Cyan 78C1XC0 78C2XC0 78C3XC0 78C4XC0 78C5XC0 78C6XC0

Magenta 78C1XM0 78C2XM0 78C3XM0 78C4XM0 78C5XM0 78C6XM0

Yellow 78C1XY0 78C2XY0 78C3XY0 78C4XY0 78C5XY0 78C6XY0

Black 78C1XK0 78C2XK0 78C3XK0 78C4XK0 78C5XK0 78C6XK0

Ultra high yield Return Program toner cartridges2

Cyan 78C1UC0 78C2UC0 78C3UC0 78C4UC0 78C5UC0 78C6UC0

Magenta 78C1UM0 78C2UM0 78C3UM0 78C4UM0 78C5UM0 78C6UM0

Yellow 78C1UY0 78C2UY0 78C3UY0 78C4UY0 78C5UY0 78C6UY0

Black 78C1UK0 78C2UK0 78C3UK0 78C4UK0 78C5UK0 78C6UK0

1 Supported only in the CX421, CX522, CX622, and CX625 printer models.

2 Supported only in the CX622 and CX625 printer models.

For more information on countries located in each region, go to www.lexmark.com/regions.

Lexmark CX421, CX522, CX622, and CX625 Regular toner cartridges

Item Part number

Extra high yield toner cartridges1

Cyan 78C0X20

Magenta 78C0X30

Yellow 78C0X40

Black 78C0X10

Ultra high yield toner cartridges2

Cyan 78C0U20

Magenta 78C0U30

Yellow 78C0U40

1 Supported only in the CX421 and CX522 printer models.

2 Supported only in the CX622 and CX625 printer models.

Maintaining the printer 177

Item Part number

Black 78C0U10

1 Supported only in the CX421 and CX522 printer models.

2 Supported only in the CX622 and CX625 printer models.

Lexmark MC2325, MC2425, MC2535, and MC2640 Return Program toner cartridges

Item United States

and Canada

European

Economic

Area

Rest of Asia

Paciﬁc

Latin America Rest of

Europe,

Middle East,

and Africa

Australia and

New Zealand

Return Program toner cartridges

Cyan C2310C0 C2320C0 C2330C0 C2340C0 C2350C0 C2360C0

Magenta C2310M0 C2320M0 C2330M0 C2340M0 C2350M0 C2360M0

Yellow C2310Y0 C2320Y0 C2330Y0 C2340Y0 C2350Y0 C2360Y0

Black C2310K0 C2320K0 C2330K0 C2340K0 C2350K0 C2360K0

High yield Return Program toner cartridges

Cyan C231HC0 C232HC0 C233HC0 C234HC0 C235HC0 C236HC0

Magenta C231HM0 C232HM0 C233HM0 C234HM0 C235HM0 C236HM0

Yellow C231HY0 C232HY0 C233HY0 C234HY0 C235HY0 C236HY0

Black C231HK0 C232HK0 C233HK0 C234HK0 C235HK0 C236HK0

Extra high yield Return Program toner cartridges1

Cyan C241XC0 C242XC0 C243XC0 C244XC0 C245XC0 C246XC0

Magenta C241XM0 C242XM0 C243XM0 C244XM0 C245XM0 C246XM0

Yellow C241XY0 C242XY0 C243XY0 C244XY0 C245XY0 C246XY0

Black C241XK0 C242XK0 C243XK0 C244XK0 C245XK0 C246XK0

Ultra high yield Return Program toner cartridge2

Black C251UK0 C252UK0 C253UK0 C254UK0 C255UK0 C256UK0

1 Supported only in the MC2425, MC2535, and MC2640 printer models.

2 Supported only in the MC2535 and MC2640 printer models.

For more information on countries located in each region, go to www.lexmark.com/regions.

Maintaining the printer 178

Lexmark MC2325, MC2425, MC2535, and MC2640 Regular toner cartridges

Item Part number

High yield toner cartridges1

Cyan C230H20

Magenta C230H30

Yellow C230H40

Black C230H10

Extra high yield toner cartridges

Cyan2C240X20

Magenta2C240X30

Yellow2C240X40

Black3C240X10

Ultra high yield toner cartridge4

Black C250U10

1 Supported only in the MC2325 printer model.

2 Supported only in the MC2425, MC2535, and MC2640 printer models.

3 Supported only in the MC2425 printer model.

4 Supported only in MC2535 and MC2640 printer models.

Lexmark XC2235 Regular toner cartridges

Item United States,

Canada, Australia,

and New Zealand

Europe, Middle East,

and Africa

Rest of Asia Paciﬁc Latin America

Cyan 24B7154 24B7178 24B7202 24B7230

Magenta 24B7155 24B7179 24B7203 24B7231

Yellow 24B7156 24B7180 24B7204 24B7232

Black 24B7157 24B7181 24B7205 24B7233

Lexmark XC4240 Regular toner cartridges

Item United States,

Canada, Australia,

and New Zealand

Europe, Middle East,

and Africa

Rest of Asia Paciﬁc Latin America

Cyan 24B7158 24B7182 24B7206 24B7234

Magenta 24B7159 24B7183 24B7207 24B7235

Yellow 24B7160 24B7184 24B7208 24B7236

Black 24B7161 24B7185 24B7209 24B7237

Maintaining the printer 179

Ordering an imaging kit

Item Part number

Return Program imaging kit

Black Return Program imaging kit 78C0ZK0

Black and color Return Program imaging kit 78C0ZV0

Regular imaging kit

Black imaging kit 78C0Z10

Black and color imaging kit 78C0Z50

Ordering a waste toner bottle

Item Part number

Waste toner bottle 78C0W00

Ordering a maintenance kit

Match the maintenance kit to the printer voltage.

Notes:

•Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.

•The maintenance kit includes a fuser and pick tires. These parts may be individually ordered and

replaced if necessary.

Item Part number

100 V fuser maintenance kit 41X2095

110 V fuser maintenance kit 41X2096

220 V fuser maintenance kit 41X2097

Note: Only an authorized service technician can replace the maintenance kit. Contact your service provider.

Replacing parts and supplies

Replacing a toner cartridge

1Open door B until it clicks into place.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

Maintaining the printer 180

2Remove the used toner cartridge.

3Unpack the new toner cartridge.

Maintaining the printer 181

4Insert the new toner cartridge.

5Close door B.

Replacing the waste toner bottle

1Open door B until it clicks into place.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

Maintaining the printer 182

2Open door A.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a

hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

Maintaining the printer 183

3Remove the right side cover.

4Remove the used waste toner bottle.

Note: To avoid spilling the toner, place the bottle in an upright position.

5Unpack the new waste toner bottle.

Maintaining the printer 184

6Insert the new waste toner bottle.

7Insert the right side cover.

Maintaining the printer 185

8Close door B.

9Close door A.

Replacing an imaging kit

1Open door B until it clicks into place.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

2Open door A.

Maintaining the printer 186

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a

hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

3Remove the right side cover.

Maintaining the printer 187

4Remove the waste toner bottle.

5Remove the toner cartridges.

Maintaining the printer 188

6Remove the used imaging kit.

7Unpack the new imaging kit.

Black imaging kit Black and color imaging kit

Notes:

•The black imaging kit includes the imaging kit and the black developer unit.

•The black and color imaging kit includes the imaging kit and the black, cyan, magenta, and yellow

developer units.

•When replacing the black imaging kit, save the cyan, magenta, and yellow developer units from the

used imaging kit.

Maintaining the printer 189

8Remove the packing material.

Note: If you are replacing the black imaging kit, then insert the magenta, cyan, and yellow developer

units into the new imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to direct light. Extended exposure to light

may cause print quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may aect the quality of

future print jobs.

Maintaining the printer 190

9Insert the imaging kit until it is fully seated.

10 Insert the toner cartridges.

Maintaining the printer 191

11 Insert the waste toner bottle.

12 Insert the right side cover.

Maintaining the printer 192

13 Close door B.

14 Close door A.

Moving the printer

Moving the printer to another location

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may require

two or more people to lift it safely.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, use only the power cord

provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: When moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal

injury or printer damage:

•Make sure that all doors and trays are closed.

•Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.

•If the printer has separate ﬂoor-standing optional trays or output options attached to it, then disconnect

them before moving the printer.

•If the printer has a caster base, then carefully roll it to the new location. Use caution when passing over

thresholds and breaks in ﬂooring.

Maintaining the printer 193

•If the printer does not have a caster base but is conﬁgured with optional trays or output options, then remove

the output options and lift the printer o the trays. Do not try to lift the printer and any options at the same

time.

•Always use the handholds on the printer to lift it.

•Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.

•Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the

options.

•Keep the printer in an upright position.

•Avoid severe jarring movements.

•Make sure that your ﬁngers are not under the printer when you set it down.

•Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the printer.

Note: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.

Shipping the printer

For shipping instructions, go to http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.

Saving energy and paper

Conﬁguring power save mode settings

Sleep mode

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Power Management > Timeouts > Sleep Mode

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Enter the amount of time that the printer stays idle before it enters Sleep mode.

Hibernate mode

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Power Management > Timeouts > Hibernate Timeout

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Select the amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.

Notes:

•Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job.

•To wake the printer from Hibernate mode, press the power button.

•The Embedded Web Server is disabled when the printer is in Hibernate mode.

Maintaining the printer 194

Adjusting the brightness of the display

Note: This setting is available only in some printer models.

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Preferences

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2In the Screen Brightness menu, adjust the setting.

Conserving supplies

•Print on both sides of the paper.

Note: Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.

•Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.

•Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before printing it.

•Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.

Recycling

Recycling Lexmark products

To return Lexmark products for recycling:

1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.

2Select the product you want to recycle.

Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark Collection and Recycling Program may be

recycled through your local recycling center.

Recycling Lexmark packaging

Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are

transported in the most ecient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to

dispose of. These eciencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource

savings. Lexmark also oers recycling of packaging components in some countries or regions. For more

information, go to www.lexmark.com/recycle, and then choose your country or region. Information on available

packaging recycling programs is included with the information on product recycling.

Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your

area.

The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist

in your area.

When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark recycles

the box.

Maintaining the printer 195

Clearing jams

Avoiding jams

Load paper properly

•Make sure that the paper lies ﬂat in the tray.

Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper

•Do not load or remove a tray while the printer is printing.

•Do not load too much paper. Make sure that the stack height is below the maximum paper ﬁll indicator.

•Do not slide paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.

•Make sure that the paper guides are positioned correctly and are not pressing tightly against the paper or

envelopes.

•Push the tray ﬁrmly into the printer after loading paper.

Use recommended paper

•Use only recommended paper or specialty media.

•Do not load paper that is wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled.

Clearing jams 196

•Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.

•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.

•Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.

•Make sure that the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.

•Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.

Identifying jam locations

Notes:

•When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer ﬂushes blank pages or pages with partial prints after a jammed

page has been cleared. Check your printed output for blank pages.

•When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages.

Jam location

1Automatic document feeder (ADF)

2Standard bin

3Door A

4Trays

5Multipurpose feeder

6Manual feeder

Clearing jams 197

Paper jam in trays

1Remove the tray.

2Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

3Insert the tray.

Paper jam in door A

Paper jam below the fuser

1Open door A, and then open door B until it clicks into place.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a

hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

Clearing jams 198

2Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams 199

3Close doors B and A.

Paper jam in the fuser

1Open doors A and B.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a

hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

Clearing jams 200

2Open the fuser access door, and then remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams 201

3Close doors B and A.

Paper jam in the duplex unit

1Open door A.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a

hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

Clearing jams 202

2Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

3Close door A.

Clearing jams 203

Paper jam in door C

1Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.

2Open door C.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

3Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

4Close door C.

Paper jam in the standard bin

1Open door B until it clicks into place, and then remove the jammed paper.

Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal

frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams 204

2Open door A.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a

hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

Clearing jams 205

3Open the fuser access door, and then remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams 206

4Close doors A and B.

Clearing jams 207

Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder

Note: The multipurpose feeder is available only in some printer models.

1Remove paper from the multipurpose feeder.

2Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

3Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.

4Reload paper.

Clearing jams 208

Paper jam in the manual feeder

1Remove the tray.

2Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

3Insert the tray.

Clearing jams 209

Troubleshooting

Print quality problems

Find the image that resembles the print quality problem you are having, and then click the link below it to read

problem-solving steps.

“Blank or white pages” on

page 211

“Dark print” on page 212 “Ghost images” on page 213 “Gray or colored background”

on page 215

“Incorrect margins” on

page 215

“Light print” on page 216 “Missing colors” on page 218 “Mottled print and dots” on

page 219

“Paper curl” on page

243

“Print crooked or skewed”

on page 220

“Solid color or black images”

on page 221

“Text or images cut o” on

page 221

Troubleshooting 210

“Toner easily rubs o” on

page 222

“Uneven print density” on

page 223

“Horizontal dark lines” on

page 224

“Vertical dark lines” on

page 225

“Horizontal white lines”

on page 227

“Vertical white lines” on

page 228

“Repeating defects” on

page 229

Printing problems

Print quality is poor

Blank or white pages

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Troubleshooting 211

Action Yes No

aRemove, and then insert the imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit

to direct light. Extended exposure to light may cause print

quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing blank or white pages?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Dark print

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aPerform Color Adjust.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Print > Quality > Advanced Imaging > Color Adjust

bPrint the document.

Is the print too dark?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aDepending on your operating system, reduce toner darkness

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Note: You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to:

Settings > Print > Quality > Toner Darkness

bPrint the document.

Is the print too dark?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 212

Action Yes No

Step 3

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bPrint the document.

Is the print too dark?

Go to step 4. The problem is

solved.

Step 4

Check if the paper has texture or rough ﬁnishes.

Are you printing on textured or rough paper?

Go to step 5. Go to step 6.

Step 5

aReplace textured or rough paper with plain paper.

bPrint the document.

Is the print too dark?

Go to step 6. The problem is

solved.

Step 6

aLoad paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store

paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.

bPrint the document.

Is the print too dark?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Ghost images

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Troubleshooting 213

Action Yes No

Step 1

aLoad the tray with the correct paper type.

bPrint the document.

Do ghost images appear on prints?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bPrint the document.

Do ghost images appear on prints?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

aPerform Color Adjust.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Print > Quality > Advanced Imaging > Color Adjust

bPrint the document.

Do ghost images appear on prints?

Go to step 4. The problem is

solved.

Step 4

aRemove, and then insert the imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit

to direct light. Extended exposure to light may cause print

quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Do ghost images appear on prints?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 214

Gray or colored background

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aPerform Color Adjust.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Print > Quality > Advanced Imaging > Color Adjust

bPrint the document.

Does gray or colored background appear on prints?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aRemove, and then insert the imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit

to direct light. Extended exposure to light may cause print

quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Does gray or colored background appear on prints?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Incorrect margins

Troubleshooting 215

Action Yes No

Step 1

aAdjust the paper guides to the correct position for the paper

loaded.

bPrint the document.

Are the margins correct?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

aSet the paper size from the control panel. Navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bPrint the document.

Are the margins correct?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Note: Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

bPrint the document.

Are the margins correct?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Light print

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aPerform Color Adjust.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Print > Quality > Advanced Imaging > Color Adjust

bPrint the document.

Is the print light?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 216

Action Yes No

Step 2

aDepending on your operating system, increase toner darkness

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Note: You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to:

Settings > Print > Quality > Toner Darkness

bPrint the document.

Is the print light?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

aTurn o Color Saver.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Print > Quality > Color Saver

bPrint the document.

Is the print light?

Go to step 4. The problem is

solved.

Step 4

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bPrint the document.

Is the print light?

Go to step 5. The problem is

solved.

Step 5

Check if paper has texture or rough ﬁnishes.

Are you printing on textured or rough paper?

Go to step 6. Go to step 7.

Step 6

aReplace textured or rough paper with plain paper.

bPrint the document.

Is the print light?

Go to step 7. The problem is

solved.

Step 7

aLoad paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store

paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.

bPrint the document.

Is the print light?

Go to step 8. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 217

Action Yes No

Step 8

aRemove, and then insert the imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit

to direct light. Extended exposure to light may cause print

quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Is the print light?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Missing colors

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

aRemove the toner cartridge of the missing color.

bRemove the imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit

to direct light. Extended exposure to light may cause print

quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

cRemove, and then insert the developer unit of the missing color.

dInsert the imaging kit.

eInsert the toner cartridge.

fPrint the document.

Are some colors missing on prints?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 218

Mottled print and dots

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

Check the printer for leaked toner contamination.

Is the printer free of leaked toner?

Go to step 2. Contact customer

support.

Step 2

aFrom the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bCheck if the paper size and paper type settings match the

paper loaded.

Note: Make sure that paper does not have texture or rough

ﬁnishes.

Do the settings match?

Go to step 4. Go to step 3.

Step 3

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size

and paper type from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Note: Make sure that the settings match the paper loaded.

bPrint the document.

Is the print mottled?

Go to step 4. The problem is

solved.

Step 4

aLoad paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store

paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.

bPrint the document.

Is the print mottled?

Go to step 5. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 219

Action Yes No

Step 5

aRemove, and then insert the imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit

to direct light. Extended exposure to light may cause print

quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Is the print mottled?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Print crooked or skewed

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aAdjust the paper guides in the tray to the correct position for

the paper loaded.

bPrint the document.

Is the print crooked or skewed?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aLoad paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store

paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.

bPrint the document.

Is the print crooked or skewed?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 220

Action Yes No

Step 3

aCheck if the paper loaded is supported.

Note: If paper is not supported, then load a supported paper.

bPrint the document.

Is the print crooked or skewed?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Solid color or black images

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit

to direct light. Extended exposure to light may cause print

quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing solid color or black images?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Text or images cut o

Troubleshooting 221

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aAdjust the paper guides in the tray to the correct position for

the paper loaded.

bPrint the document.

Are text or images cut o?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bPrint the document.

Are text or images cut o?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

aRemove, and then insert the imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit

to direct light. Extended exposure to light may cause print

quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Are text or images cut o?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Toner easily rubs o

Troubleshooting 222

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bPrint the document.

Does toner easily rub o?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aCheck if the paper weight is supported.

Note: If paper weight is not supported, then load a supported

one.

bPrint the document.

Does toner easily rub o?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

aLoad paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store

paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.

bPrint the document.

Does toner easily rub o?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Uneven print density

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Troubleshooting 223

Action Yes No

aRemove, and then insert the imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit

to direct light. Extended exposure to light may cause print

quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Is the print density uneven?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Horizontal dark lines

Notes:

•Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press

to navigate through the settings.

•If horizontal dark lines keep appearing on the prints, then see the “Repeating defects” topic.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bPrint the document.

Do dark lines appear on prints?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 224

Action Yes No

Step 2

aLoad paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store

paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

bPrint the document.

Do dark lines appear on prints?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

aRemove, and then insert the imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit

to direct light. Extended exposure to light may cause print

quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Do dark lines appear on prints?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Vertical dark lines

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Troubleshooting 225

Action Yes No

Step 1

Using a blank sheet of paper, make a two‑sided copy using the

ADF.

Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?

Go to step 2. Go to step 3.

Step 2

Using a damp, soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the following areas:

•ADF glass pad (A) and ADF glass (B)

•ADF glass pad (A) and ADF glass (B) in door C

Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 226

Action Yes No

Step 3

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bPrint the document.

Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?

Go to step 4. The problem is

solved.

Step 4

aLoad paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store

paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

bPrint the document.

Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?

Go to step 5. The problem is

solved.

Step 5

aRemove, and then insert the imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit

to direct light. Extended exposure to light can cause print

quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Horizontal white lines

Troubleshooting 227

Notes:

•Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press

to navigate through the settings.

•If horizontal white lines keep appearing on your prints, then see the “Repeating defects” topic.

Action Yes No

Step 1

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bPrint the document.

Do horizontal white lines appear on prints?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aRemove, and then insert the imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit

to direct light. Extended exposure to light can cause print

quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Do horizontal white lines appear on prints?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Vertical white lines

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Troubleshooting 228

Action Yes No

Step 1

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bPrint the document.

Do vertical white lines appear on prints?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

Check if you are using the recommended paper type.

aLoad the paper source with the recommended paper type.

bPrint the document.

Do vertical white lines appear on prints?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

aRemove, and then insert the imaging kit.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit

to direct light. Extended exposure to light may cause print

quality problems.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the

photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may

aect the quality of future print jobs.

bPrint the document.

Do vertical white lines appear on prints?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Repeating defects

Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to

Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to

navigate through the settings.

Troubleshooting 229

Action Yes No

aUsing the Print Quality Test Pages, measure the distance

between the repeating defects on the aected color page.

bCheck if the repeating defects match any of the following

measurements:

Imaging kit

•94.20 mm (3.71 in.)

•29.80 mm (1.17 in.)

•23.20 mm (0.91 in.)

Developer unit

•43.90 mm (1.73 in.)

•45.50 mm (1.79 in.)

Transfer module

•37.70 mm (1.48 in.)

•78.50 mm (3.09 in.)

•55 mm (2.17 in.)

Fuser

•79.80 mm (3.14 in.)

•94.30 mm (3.71 in.)

Do the repeating defects match any of the measurements?

Take note of the

distance, and then

contact customer

support.

Take note of the

distance, and then

contact customer

support.

Print jobs do not print

Action Yes No

Step 1

aFrom the document you are trying to print, open the Print

dialog, and then check if you have selected the correct printer.

bPrint the document.

Is the document printed?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

aCheck if the printer is on.

bResolve any error messages that appear on the display.

cPrint the document.

Is the document printed?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Troubleshooting 230

Action Yes No

Step 3

aCheck if the ports are working and if the cables are securely

connected to the computer and the printer.

For more information, see the setup documentation that came

with the printer.

bPrint the document.

Is the document printed?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 4.

Step 4

aTurn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on

the printer.

bPrint the document.

Is the document printed?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 5.

Step 5

aRemove, and then reinstall the print driver.

bPrint the document.

Is the document printed?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Slow printing

Action Yes No

Step 1

Make sure that the printer cable is securely connected to the

printer and to the computer, print server, option, or other network

device.

Is the printer printing slow?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aMake sure that the printer is not in Quiet Mode.

•From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Maintenance > Conﬁg Menu > Device

Operations > Quiet Mode

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing slow?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 231

Action Yes No

Step 3

aDepending on your operating system, specify the print

resolution from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

bSet the resolution to 4800 CQ.

cPrint the document.

Is the printer printing slow?

Go to step 4. The problem is

solved.

Step 4

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration

> Paper Size/Type. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,

press to navigate through the settings.

•Heavier paper prints more slowly.

•Paper narrower than letter, A4, and legal may print more

slowly.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing slow?

Go to step 5. The problem is

solved.

Step 5

aMake sure that the printer settings for texture and weight match

the paper being loaded.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Media Conﬁguration > Media Types

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

Note: Rough paper textures and heavy paper weights may

print more slowly.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing slow?

Go to step 6. The problem is

solved.

Step 6

Remove held jobs.

Is the printer printing slow?

Go to step 7. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 232

Action Yes No

Step 7

aMake sure that the printer is not overheating.

Notes:

•Allow the printer to cool down after a long print job.

•Observe the recommended ambient temperature for the

printer. For more information, see “Selecting a location

for the printer” on page 11.

bPrint the document.

Is the printer printing slow?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if you are printing on the correct paper.

bPrint the document.

Is the document printed on the correct paper?

Go to step 2. Load the correct

paper size and paper

type.

Step 2

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size

and paper type from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Note: You can also change the settings on the printer control

panel. Navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

bMake sure that the settings match the paper loaded.

cPrint the document.

Is the document printed on the correct paper?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

aCheck if the trays are linked.

For more information, see “Linking trays” on page 36.

bPrint the document.

Is the document printed from the correct tray?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 233

Conﬁdential and other held documents do not print

Action Yes No

Step 1

aFrom the control panel, check if the documents appear in the

Held Jobs list.

Note: If the documents are not listed, then print the

documents using the Print and Hold options.

bPrint the documents.

Are the documents printed?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.

•Delete the print job, and then send it again.

•For PDF ﬁles, generate a new ﬁle, and then print the

documents.

Are the documents printed?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading

the multiple job titles as duplicates.

For Windows users

aOpen the Printing Preferences dialog.

bFrom the Print and Hold section, select Keep duplicate

documents.

cEnter a PIN.

dResend the print job.

For Macintosh users

aSave and name each job dierently.

bSend the job individually.

Are the documents printed?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 4.

Step 4

aDelete some held jobs to free up printer memory.

bResend the print job.

Are the documents printed?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 5.

Step 5

aAdd printer memory.

bResend the print job.

Are the documents printed?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 234

The printer is not responding

Action Yes No

Step 1

Check if the power cord is connected to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or

electrical shock, connect the power cord to an appropriately

rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the

product and easily accessible.

Is the printer responding?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Check if the electrical outlet is turned o by a switch or breaker.

Is the electrical outlet turned o by a switch or breaker?

Turn on the switch or

reset the breaker.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

Check if the printer is on.

Is the printer on?

Go to step 4. Turn on the printer.

Step 4

Check if the printer is in Sleep or Hibernate mode.

Is the printer in Sleep or Hibernate mode?

Press the power

button to wake the

printer.

Go to step 5.

Step 5

Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are

inserted to the correct ports.

Are the cables inserted to the correct ports?

Go to step 6. Insert the cables to

the correct ports.

Step 6

Turn o the printer, install the hardware options, and then turn on

the printer.

For more information, see the documentation that came with the

option.

Is the printer responding?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 7.

Step 7

Install the correct print driver.

Is the printer responding?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 8.

Step 8

Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the

printer.

Is the printer responding?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 235

Unable to read ﬂash drive

Action Yes No

Step 1

Check if the printer is not busy processing another print, copy,

scan, or fax job.

Is the printer ready?

Go to step 2. Wait for the printer to

ﬁnish processing the

other job.

Step 2

Check if the ﬂash drive is supported. For more information, see

“Supported ﬂash drives and ﬁle types” on page 44.

Is the ﬂash drive supported?

Go to step 3. Insert a supported

ﬂash drive.

Step 3

Remove, and then insert the ﬂash drive.

Does the printer recognize the ﬂash drive?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Enabling the USB port

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Network/Ports > USB > Enable USB Port

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

Troubleshooting 236

Network connection problems

Cannot open Embedded Web Server

Action Yes No

Step 1

Check if the printer is on.

Is the printer on?

Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.

Step 2

Make sure that the printer IP address is correct.

View the printer IP address:

•From the home screen

•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu

•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page,

and then ﬁnding the TCP/IP section

Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated

by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

Is the printer IP address correct?

Go to step 3. Type the correct

printer IP address in

the address ﬁeld.

Step 3

Check if you are using a supported browser:

•Internet Explorer® version 11 or later

•Microsoft EdgeTM

•Safari version 6 or later

•Google ChromeTM version 32 or later

•Mozilla Firefox version 24 or later

Is your browser supported?

Go to step 4. Install a supported

browser.

Step 4

Check if the network connection is working.

Is the network connection working?

Go to step 5. Contact your

administrator.

Step 5

Make sure that the cable connections to the printer and print server

are secure. For more information, see the documentation that

came with the printer.

Are the cable connections secure?

Go to step 6. Secure the cable

connections.

Step 6

Check if the web proxy servers are disabled.

Are the web proxy servers disabled?

Go to step 7. Contact your

administrator.

Troubleshooting 237

Action Yes No

Step 7

Access the Embedded Web Server.

Did the Embedded Web Server open?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Cannot connect the printer to the Wi‑Fi network

Action Yes No

Step 1

Make sure that Active Adapter is set to Auto.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Network/Ports > Network Overview > Active Adapter

> Auto

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

Can the printer connect to the Wi‑Fi network?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Check if the correct Wi‑Fi network is selected.

Note: Some routers may share the default SSID.

Are you connecting to the correct Wi‑Fi network?

Go to step 4. Go to step 3.

Step 3

Connect to the correct Wi‑Fi network. For more information, see

“Connecting the printer to a Wi‑Fi network” on page 168.

Can the printer connect to the Wi‑Fi network?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 4.

Step 4

Check the wireless security mode.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Wireless Security Mode

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

Is the correct wireless security mode selected?

Go to step 6. Go to step 5.

Step 5

Select the correct wireless security mode.

Can the printer connect to the Wi‑Fi network?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 6.

Troubleshooting 238

Action Yes No

Step 6

Make sure that you entered the correct network password.

Note: Take note of the spaces, numbers, and capitalization in the

password.

Can the printer connect to the Wi‑Fi network?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Checking the printer connectivity

1Print the Network Setup Page.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Reports > Network > Network Setup Page

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Check the ﬁrst section of the page and conﬁrm that the status is connected.

If the status is not connected, then the LAN drop may be inactive or the network cable may be unplugged

or malfunctioning. Contact your administrator for assistance.

Hardware options problems

Cannot detect internal option

Action Yes No

Step 1

Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the

printer.

Does the internal option operate correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Print the Menu Settings Page, and then check if the internal option

appears in the Installed Features list.

Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?

Go to step 4. Go to step 3.

Troubleshooting 239

Action Yes No

Step 3

Check if the internal option is installed properly into the controller

board.

aTurn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the

electrical outlet.

bMake sure that the internal option is installed in the appropriate

connector in the controller board.

cConnect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn

on the printer.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre

or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an

appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet

that is near the product and easily accessible.

Does the internal option operate correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 4.

Step 4

aCheck if the internal option is available in the print driver.

Note: If necessary, manually add the internal option in the

print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more

information, see “Adding available options in the print driver”

on page 273.

bResend the print job.

Does the internal option operate correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Defective ﬂash detected

Try one or more of the following:

•Replace the defective ﬂash memory.

•From the printer control panel, select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.

•Cancel the current print job.

Not enough free space in ﬂash memory for resources

Try one or more of the following:

•From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the ﬂash memory.

•Install ﬂash memory with larger capacity.

Note: Downloaded fonts and macros that are not previously stored in the ﬂash memory are deleted.

Troubleshooting 240

Unformatted ﬂash detected

Try one or more of the following:

•From the control panel, select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.

•Format the ﬂash memory.

Note: If the error message remains, then the ﬂash memory may be defective and needs to be

replaced.

Issues with supplies

Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch

To correct this problem, purchase a cartridge with the correct region that matches the printer region, or

purchase a worldwide cartridge.

•The ﬁrst number in the message after 42 indicates the region of the printer.

•The second number in the message after 42 indicates the region of the cartridge.

Printer and toner cartridge regions

Region Numeric code

Worldwide or Undeﬁned region 0

North America (United States, Canada) 1

European Economic Area, Western Europe, Nordic countries, Switzerland 2

Asia Paciﬁc 3

Latin America 4

Rest of Europe, Middle East, Africa 5

Australia, New Zealand 6

Invalid region 9

Note: To ﬁnd the region settings of the printer and toner cartridge, print the print quality test pages.

From the control panel, navigate to: Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages.

Non‑Lexmark supply

The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.

Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-

party supplies or parts may aect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging

components.

All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver unpredictable

results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may

damage your Lexmark printer or associated components.

Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can aect warranty coverage.

Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.

Troubleshooting 241

To accept any and all of these risks and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your

printer, from the control panel, press and hold X and # simultaneously for 15 seconds.

If you do not want to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer and

install a genuine Lexmark supply or part. For more information, see “Using genuine Lexmark parts and

supplies” on page 176.

If the printer does not print after pressing and holding X and # simultaneously for 15 seconds, then reset

the supply usage counter.

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Maintenance > Conﬁguration Menu > Supply Usage And Counters

2Select the part or supply that you want to reset, and then select Start.

3Read the warning message, and then select Continue.

4Press and hold X and # simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message.

Note: If you are unable to reset the supply usage counters, then return the item to the place of

purchase.

Scanner maintenance required, use ADF Kit

The printer is scheduled for maintenance. For more information, go to http://support.lexmark.com or

contact your service representative, and then report the message.

Paper feed problems

Envelope seals when printing

Action Yes No

Step 1

aUse an envelope that has been stored in a dry environment.

Note: Printing on envelopes with high moisture content can

seal the ﬂaps.

bSend the print job.

Does the envelope seal when printing?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aMake sure that paper type is set to Envelope.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

bSend the print job.

Does the envelope seal when printing?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 242

Collated printing does not work

Action Yes No

Step 1

aFrom the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Print > Layout > Collate

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

bSelect On [1,2,1,2,1,2].

cPrint the document.

Is the document collated correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

aFrom the document that you are trying to print, open the Print

dialog, and then select Collate.

bPrint the document.

Is the document collated correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

aReduce the number of pages to print.

bPrint the document.

Are the pages collated correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Paper curl

Action Yes No

Step 1

aAdjust the guides in the tray to the correct position for the paper

loaded.

bPrint the document.

Is the paper curled?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 243

Action Yes No

Step 2

aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type

from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.

Notes:

•Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.

•You can also change the setting on the printer control

panel. Navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

bPrint the document.

Is the paper curled?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Step 3

Print on the other side of the paper.

aRemove paper, ﬂip it over, and then reload paper.

bPrint the document.

Is the paper curled?

Go to step 4. The problem is

solved.

Step 4

aLoad paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store

paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.

bPrint the document.

Is the paper curled?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Tray linking does not work

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the trays contain the same paper size and paper type.

bCheck if the paper guides are positioned correctly.

cPrint the document.

Do the trays link correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Troubleshooting 244

Action Yes No

Step 2

aFrom the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

bSet the paper size and paper type to match the paper loaded

in the linked trays.

cPrint the document.

Do the trays link correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

aMake sure that Tray Linking is set to Automatic. For more

information, see “Linking trays” on page 36.

bPrint the document.

Do the trays link correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Paper frequently jams

Action Yes No

Step 1

aRemove the tray.

bCheck if paper is loaded correctly.

Notes:

•Make sure that the paper guides are positioned correctly.

•Make sure that the stack height is below the maximum

paper ﬁll indicator.

•Make sure to print on recommended paper size and type.

cInsert the tray.

dPrint the document.

Do paper jams occur frequently?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Step 2

aFrom the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Paper > Tray Conﬁguration > Paper Size/Type

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

bSet the correct paper size and type.

cPrint the document.

Do paper jams occur frequently?

Go to step 3. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 245

Action Yes No

Step 3

aLoad paper from a fresh package.

Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store

paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.

bPrint the document.

Do paper jams occur frequently?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Jammed pages are not reprinted

Action Yes No

aFrom the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Notiﬁcations > Jam Content Recovery

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

bIn the Jam Recovery menu, select On or Auto.

cPrint the document.

Are the jammed pages reprinted?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Color quality problems

Adjusting toner darkness

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Print > Quality > Toner Darkness

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2Adjust the setting.

3Apply the changes.

Modifying the colors in printed output

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Print > Quality > Advanced Imaging > Color Correction

2From the Color Correction menu, select Manual > Color Correction Content.

3Choose the appropriate color conversion setting.

Troubleshooting 246

Object type Color conversion tables

RGB Image

RGB Text

RGB Graphics

•Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be

applied to all incoming color formats.

•sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the colors

displayed on a computer monitor. Black toner usage is optimized

for printing photographs.

•Display‑True Black—Produces an output that approximates the

colors displayed on a computer monitor. This setting uses only

black toner to create all levels of neutral gray.

•sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB

Display color correction. Black toner usage is optimized for

printing business graphics.

•O

CMYK Image

CMYK Text

CMYK Graphics

•US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the

Speciﬁcations for Web Oset Publishing (SWOP) color output.

•Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate Euroscale

color output.

•Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color

correction setting.

•O

FAQ about color printing

What is RGB color?

RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue used to produce

a certain color. Red, green, and blue light can be added in various amounts to produce a large range of colors

observed in nature. Computer screens, scanners, and digital cameras use this method to display colors.

What is CMYK color?

CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black

used to reproduce a particular color. Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various

amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature. Printing presses, inkjet printers, and color

laser printers create colors in this manner.

How is color speciﬁed in a document to be printed?

Software programs are used to specify and modify the document color using RGB or CMYK color

combinations. For more information, see the software program Help topics.

How does the printer know what color to print?

When printing a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer and

is passed through color conversion tables. Color is translated into the appropriate amounts of cyan, magenta,

yellow, and black toner used to produce the color you want. The object information determines the application

of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text while

applying a dierent color conversion table to photographic images.

Troubleshooting 247

What is manual color correction?

When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user‑selected color conversion tables to

process objects. Manual color correction settings are speciﬁc to the type of object being printed (text,

graphics, or images). It is also speciﬁc to how the color of the object is speciﬁed in the software program

(RGB or CMYK combinations). To apply a dierent color conversion table manually, see “Modifying the colors

in printed output” on page 246.

If the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations, then manual color correction

is not useful. It is also not eective if the software program or the computer operating system controls the

adjustment of colors. In most situations, setting the Color Correction to Auto generates preferred colors for

the documents.

How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?

From the printer Quality menu, nine types of Color Samples sets are available. These sets are also available

from the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates

multiple‑page prints consisting of hundreds of colored boxes. Each box contains a CMYK or RGB combination,

depending on the table selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB

combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table.

By examining Color Samples sets, you can identify the box with color closest to the color being matched.

The color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software

program. For more information, see the software program Help topics. Manual color correction may be

necessary to use the selected color conversion table for the particular object.

Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color‑matching problem depends on:

•The Color Correction setting being used (Auto, O, or Manual)

•The type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images)

•How the color of the object is speciﬁed in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations)

If the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations, then the Color Samples

pages are not useful. Additionally, some software programs adjust the RGB or CMYK combinations speciﬁed

in the program through color management. In these situations, the printed color may not be an exact match

of the Color Samples pages.

The print appears tinted

Action Yes No

Step 1

Perform Color Adjust.

aFrom the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Print > Quality > Advanced Imaging > Color Adjust

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

bPrint the document.

Does the print appear tinted?

Go to step 2. The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 248

Action Yes No

Step 2

aFrom the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Print > Quality > Advanced Imaging > Color

Balance

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

bAdjust the settings.

cPrint the document.

Does the print appear tinted?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

E-mailing problems

Cannot send e‑mails

Action Yes No

Step 1

Make sure that the e‑mail SMTP settings are conﬁgured correctly.

For more information, see “Conﬁguring the e‑mail SMTP settings”

on page 51.

Can you send an e‑mail?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Make sure that you are using the correct password. Depending on

your e‑mail service provider, use your account password, app

password, or authentication password. For more information, see

“Conﬁguring the e‑mail SMTP settings” on page 51.

Can you send an e‑mail?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

Make sure that the printer is connected to a network and that the

network is connected to the Internet.

Can you send an e‑mail?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 249

Faxing problems

Caller ID is not shown

Note: These instructions apply only to printers that support analog fax. For more information, see “Setting up

the printer to fax” on page 61.

Action Yes No

Enable caller ID.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings > Admin

Controls > Enable Caller ID

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

Does the caller ID appear?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Cannot send or receive faxes using analog fax

Action Yes No

Step 1

Resolve any error messages that appear on the display.

Can you send or receive a fax?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Make sure that the cable connections for the following equipment

are secure:

•Telephone

•Handset

•Answering machine

Can you send or receive a fax?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

Check for a dial tone.

•Call the fax number to check if it is working properly.

•If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the

volume to check if you hear a dial tone.

Can you hear a dial tone?

Go to step 5. Go to step 4.

Troubleshooting 250

Action Yes No

Step 4

Check the telephone wall jack.

aConnect the analog telephone directly to the wall jack.

bListen for a dial tone.

cIf you do not hear a dial tone, then use a dierent telephone

cable.

dIf you still do not hear a dial tone, then connect the analog

telephone to a dierent wall jack.

eIf you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.

Can you send or receive a fax?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 5.

Step 5

Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or to

the correct digital connector.

•If you are using an Integrated Services for Digital Network

(ISDN) telephone service, then connect to an analog telephone

port of an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information, contact

your ISDN provider.

•If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL ﬁlter or router that

supports analog use. For more information, contact your DSL

provider.

•If you are using a private branch exchange (PBX) telephone

service, then make sure that you are connecting to an analog

connection on the PBX. If none exists, then consider installing

an analog telephone line for the fax machine.

Can you send or receive a fax?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 6.

Step 6

Temporarily disconnect other equipment and disable other

telephone services.

aDisconnect other equipment (such as answering machines,

computers, modems, or telephone line splitters) between the

printer and the telephone line.

bDisable call waiting and voice mail. For more information,

contact your telephone company.

Can you send or receive a fax?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 7.

Step 7

Scan the original document one page at a time.

aDial the fax number.

bScan the document.

Can you send or receive a fax?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 251

Can receive but not send faxes using analog fax

Action Yes No

Step 1

Load an original document properly into the ADF tray or on the

scanner glass.

Can you send faxes?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Set up the shortcut number properly.

•Check if the shortcut number is set for the telephone number

that you want to dial.

•Dial the telephone number manually.

Can you send faxes?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Can send but not receive faxes using analog fax

Action Yes No

Step 1

Make sure that the paper source is not empty.

Can you receive faxes?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Check the ring count delay settings.

From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings > Rings to

Answer

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

Can you receive faxes?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

If the printer is printing blank pages, then see “Blank or white

pages” on page 211.

Can you receive faxes?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 252

Cannot set up etherFAX

Action Yes No

Step 1

Check the printer connectivity.

aPrint the Network Setup Page. From the control panel, navigate

to:

Settings > Reports > Network > Network Setup Page

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

bCheck the network status.

Is the printer connected to the network?

Go to step 3. Go to step 2.

Step 2

Make sure that the printer is connected to a network and that the

network is connected to the Internet.

Can you set up etherFAX?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

Make sure that etherFAX is set up correctly. For more information,

see “Setting up the fax function using etherFAX” on page 64.

Can you set up etherFAX?

The problem is

solved.

Go to

https://www.etherfa

x.net/lexmark.

Cannot send or receive faxes using etherFAX

Action Yes No

Step 1

Make sure that the printer is connected to a network and that the

network is connected to the Internet.

Can you send or receive faxes using etherFAX?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

aFrom the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > General Fax Settings.

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

bMake sure that you have the correct fax number.

cMake sure that Fax Transport is set to etherFAX.

Can you send or receive faxes using etherFAX?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Troubleshooting 253

Action Yes No

Step 3

Split large documents into smaller ﬁle sizes.

Can you send or receive faxes using etherFAX?

The problem is

solved.

Go to

https://www.etherfa

x.net/lexmark.

Poor fax print quality

Action Yes No

Step 1

Make sure that there are no print quality defects.

aFrom the control panel, navigate to Settings > Troubleshooting

> Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer

models, press to navigate through the settings.

bCorrect any print quality defects. For more information, see

“Print quality is poor” on page 211.

Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.

aFrom the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Fax > Analog Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings >

Admin Controls

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate

through the settings.

bIn the Max Speed menu, select a lower transmission speed.

Is the fax print quality satisfactory?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Missing information on the fax cover page

Action No Yes

aTurn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on

the printer.

bSend or retrieve the fax.

Is there missing information on the fax cover page?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 254

Cannot send the fax cover page from the computer

Action Yes No

Step 1

aMake sure that the print driver is updated. For more information,

see “Installing the printer software” on page 272.

bSend the fax.

Can you send the fax cover page?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

aFrom the document that you are trying to fax, open the Print

dialog.

bSelect the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences,

Options, or Setup.

cClick Fax, and then clear the Always display settings prior to

faxing setting.

dSend the fax.

Can you send the fax cover page?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Scanning problems

Cannot scan from a computer

Action Yes No

Step 1

aTurn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it

back on.

bResend the scan job.

Can you send the scan job?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

aMake sure that the cables between the printer and the print

server are secure.

For more information, see the setup documentation that came

with the printer.

bResend the scan job.

Can you send the scan job?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Troubleshooting 255

Cannot scan to a network folder

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCreate a network folder shortcut.

bScan a document using the shortcut. For more information, see

“Scanning to a network folder using a shortcut” on page 76.

Can you scan a document and save it to a network folder?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

Make sure that the network folder path and format are correct. For

example, //server_hostname/foldername/path, where

server_hostname is a fully qualiﬁed domain (FQDN) or IP

address.

Is the network folder path and format correct?

Go to step 3. Go to step 4.

Step 3

Make sure that you have a write access permission to the network

folder.

Can you scan a document and save it to a network folder?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 4.

Troubleshooting 256

Action Yes No

Step 4

Update the network folder shortcut.

aOpen a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in

the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP

address appears as four sets of numbers separated by

periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it

to load the web page correctly.

bClick Shortcuts, and then select a shortcut.

Note: If you have multiple shortcut types, then select

Network Folder.

cIn the Share Path ﬁeld, type the network folder path.

Notes:

•If your share path is \\server_hostname

\foldername\path, then

type //server_hostname/foldername/path.

•Make sure that you use forward slashes when typing the

share path.

dFrom the Authentication menu, select your authentication

method.

Note: If Authentication is set to “Use assigned username and

password,” then in the User Name and Password ﬁelds, type

your credentials.

eClick Save.

Can you scan a document and save it to a network folder?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 5.

Step 5

Make sure that the printer and the network folder are connected

to the same network.

Can you scan a document and save it to a network folder?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Partial copies of document or photo

Action Yes No

Step 1

aMake sure that the document or photo is loaded facedown on

the upper left corner of the scanner glass.

bCopy the document or photo.

Is the document or photo copied correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Troubleshooting 257

Action Yes No

Step 2

aMatch the paper size setting and the paper loaded in the tray.

bCopy the document or photo.

Is the document or photo copied correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Poor copy quality

Action Yes No

Step 1

aClean the scanner glass and the ADF glass with a damp, soft,

lint‑free cloth. If your printer has a second ADF glass inside the

ADF, then also clean that glass.

For more information, see “Cleaning the scanner” on page

173.

bMake sure that the document or photo is loaded facedown on

the upper left corner of the scanner glass.

cCopy the document or photo.

Is the copy quality satisfactory?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

aCheck the quality of the original document or photo.

bAdjust the scan quality settings.

cCopy the document or photo.

Is the copy quality satisfactory?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Scan job was not successful

Action Yes No

Step 1

Check the cable connections.

aMake sure that the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected

to the computer and the printer.

bResend the scan job.

Is the scan job successful?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Troubleshooting 258

Action Yes No

Step 2

Check the ﬁle you want to scan.

aMake sure that the ﬁle name is not already used in the

destination folder.

bMake sure that the document or photo you want to scan is not

open in another application.

cResend the scan job.

Is the scan job successful?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

aMake sure that the Append time stamp or the Overwrite

existing ﬁle check box is selected in the destination

conﬁguration settings.

bResend the scan job.

Is the scan job successful?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Scanner does not close

Action Yes No

Remove obstructions that keep the scanner cover open.

Did the scanner cover close correctly?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer

Action Yes No

Close all applications that are interfering with the scan.

Does scanning take too long or freeze the computer?

Contact customer

support.

The problem is

solved.

Troubleshooting 259

Scanner does not respond

Action Yes No

Step 1

aCheck if the power cord is connected properly to the printer

and the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre

or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an

appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet

that is near the product and easily accessible.

bCopy or scan the document.

Is the scanner responding?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 2.

Step 2

aCheck if the printer is turned on.

bResolve any error messages that appear on the display.

cCopy or scan the document.

Is the scanner responding?

The problem is

solved.

Go to step 3.

Step 3

aTurn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the

printer on.

bCopy or scan the document.

Is the scanner responding?

The problem is

solved.

Contact customer

support.

Adjusting scanner registration

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Maintenance > Conﬁguration Menu > Scanner Conﬁguration > Scanner Manual

Registration

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2From the Print Quick Test menu, select Start.

3Place the Print Quick Test page on the scanner glass, and then select Flatbed Registration.

4From the Copy Quick Test menu, select Start.

5Compare the Copy Quick Test page with the original document.

Note: If the margins of the test page are dierent from the original document, then adjust Left Margin and

Top Margin.

6Repeat step 4 and step 5 until the margins of the Copy Quick Test page closely match the original document.

Troubleshooting 260

Adjusting ADF registration

1From the control panel, navigate to:

Settings > Device > Maintenance > Conﬁguration Menu > Scanner Conﬁguration > Scanner Manual

Registration

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2From the Print Quick Test menu, select Start.

3Place the Print Quick Test page on the ADF tray.

4Select Front ADF Registration or Rear ADF Registration.

Notes:

•To align Front ADF Registration, place the test page faceup, short edge ﬁrst into the ADF.

•To align Rear ADF Registration, place the test page facedown, short edge ﬁrst into the ADF.

5From the Copy Quick Test menu, select Start.

6Compare the Copy Quick Test page with the original document.

Note: If the margins of the test page are dierent from the original document, then adjust Horizontal

Adjust and Top Margin.

7Repeat step 5 and step 6 until the margins of the Copy Quick Test page closely match the original document.

Contacting customer support

Before contacting customer support, make sure to have the following information:

•Printer problem

•Error message

•Printer model type and serial number

Go to http://support.lexmark.com to receive e‑mail or chat support, or browse through the library of manuals,

support documentation, drivers, and other downloads.

Technical support via telephone is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries

or regions, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Troubleshooting 261

Upgrading and migrating

Hardware

Available internal options

•Memory cards

–PCIe

–DDR3 DRAM

–Flash memory

•Optional cards

–Font cards

–Firmware cards

•Forms and Bar Code

•PRESCRIBE

•Printer hard disk (SATA)

Note: Some options are available only in some printer models.

Accessing the controller board

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller

board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn

the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any

other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the

printer.

1Turn o the printer.

2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3Using a ﬂat‑head screwdriver, remove the controller board access cover.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static

electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic

components or connectors.

Upgrading and migrating 262

Upgrading and migrating 263

4Attach the access cover.

5Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near and easily accessible.

6Turn on the printer.

Upgrading and migrating 264

Installing a memory card

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller

board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn

the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any

other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the

printer.

1Turn o the printer.

2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3Using a ﬂat‑head screwdriver, remove the controller board access cover.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static

electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board components or

connectors.

Upgrading and migrating 265

4Unpack the memory card.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card.

5Insert the memory card until it clicks into place.

6Attach the access cover.

7Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

8Turn on the printer.

Installing an optional card

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller

board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn

the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any

other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the

printer.

1Turn o the printer.

2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3Using a ﬂat‑head screwdriver, remove the controller board access cover.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static

electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any components or connectors.

Upgrading and migrating 266

4Unpack the optional card.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card.

5Push the card ﬁrmly into place.

Upgrading and migrating 267

Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be ﬂush against the controller

board.

Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the

controller board.

6Attach the access cover.

7Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

8Turn on the printer.

Installing a printer hard disk

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller

board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn

the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any

other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the

printer.

1Turn o the printer.

2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3Using a ﬂat‑head screwdriver, remove the controller board access cover.

Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static

electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board components or

connectors.

Upgrading and migrating 268

4Unpack the printer hard disk.

5Attach the hard disk, and then connect the hard disk interface cable to the controller board.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch or press the center of the hard disk.

Upgrading and migrating 269

6Attach the access cover.

7Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

8Turn on the printer.

Upgrading and migrating 270

Installing optional trays

Note: Depending on your printer model, you may install a 650‑sheet duo tray or both the 650‑sheet duo tray

and 550‑sheet tray.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller

board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn

the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any

other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the

printer.

1Turn o the printer.

2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.

3Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material.

4Align the printer with the optional tray, and then lower the printer into place.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (40 lb), then it requires

two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

Note: If you are installing both the optional trays, then place the 550‑sheet tray below the 650‑sheet duo

tray.

Upgrading and migrating 271

5Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of ﬁre or electrical shock, connect the power cord

to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily

accessible.

6Turn on the printer.

Add the tray in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available

options in the print driver” on page 273.

Software

Installing the printer software

Notes:

•The print driver is included in the software installer package.

•For Macintosh computers with macOS version 10.7 or later, you do not need to install the driver to print

on an AirPrint-certiﬁed printer. If you want custom printing features, then download the print driver.

1Obtain a copy of the software installer package.

•From the software CD that came with your printer.

•Go to www.lexmark.com/downloads.

2Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Installing the fax driver

1Go to www.lexmark.com/downloads, search for your printer model, and then download the appropriate

installer package.

2From your computer, click Printer Properties, and then navigate to the Conﬁguration tab.

3Select Fax, and then click Apply.

Adding printers to a computer

Before you begin, do one of the following:

•Connect the printer and the computer to the same network. For more information on connecting the printer

to a network, see “Connecting the printer to a Wi‑Fi network” on page 168.

•Connect the computer to the printer. For more information, see “Connecting a computer to the printer” on

page 171.

•Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable. For more information, see “Attaching cables” on

page 14.

Note: The USB cable is sold separately.

Upgrading and migrating 272

For Windows users

1From a computer, install the print driver.

Note: For more information, see “Installing the printer software” on page 272.

2Open Printers & scanners, and then click Add a printer or scanner.

3Depending on your printer connection, do one of the following:

•Select a printer from the list, and then click Add device.

•Click Show Wi‑Fi Direct printers, select a printer, and then click Add device.

•Click The printer that I want isn’t listed, and then from the Add Printer window, do the following:

aSelect Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname, and then click Next.

bIn the “Hostname or IP address” ﬁeld, type the printer IP address, and then click Next.

Notes:

–View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

–If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

cSelect a print driver, and then click Next.

dSelect Use the print driver that is currently installed (recommended), and then click Next.

eType a printer name, and then click Next.

fSelect a printer sharing option, and then click Next.

gClick Finish.

For Macintosh users

1From a computer, open Printers & Scanners.

2Click , and then select a printer.

3From the Use menu, select a print driver.

Notes:

•To use the Macintosh print driver, select either AirPrint or Secure AirPrint.

•If you want custom printing features, then select the Lexmark print driver. To install the driver, see

“Installing the printer software” on page 272.

4Add the printer.

Adding available options in the print driver

For Windows users

1Open the printers folder.

2Select the printer you want to update, and then do either of the following:

•For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.

•For earlier versions, select Properties.

3Navigate to the Conﬁguration tab, and then select Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.

4Apply the changes.

Upgrading and migrating 273

For Macintosh users

1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies.

2Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.

3Apply the changes.

Firmware

Exporting or importing a conﬁguration ﬁle

You can export the conﬁguration settings of your printer into a text ﬁle, and then import the ﬁle to apply the

settings to other printers.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2From the Embedded Web Server, click Export Conﬁguration or Import Conﬁguration.

3Follow the instructions on the screen.

4If the printer supports applications, then do the following:

aClick Apps > select the application > Conﬁgure.

bClick Export or Import.

Updating ﬁrmware

Some applications require a minimum device ﬁrmware level to operate correctly.

For more information on updating the device ﬁrmware, contact your Lexmark representative.

1Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address ﬁeld.

Notes:

•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of

numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.

2Click Settings > Device > Update Firmware.

3Do either of the following:

•Click Check for updates > I agree, start update.

•Upload the ﬂash ﬁle.

Note: To get the latest ﬁrmware, go to www.lexmark.com/downloads, and then search for your

printer model.

Upgrading and migrating 274

aBrowse to the ﬂash ﬁle.

Note: Make sure that you have extracted the ﬁrmware zip ﬁle.

bClick Upload > Start.

Upgrading and migrating 275

Notices

Product information

Product name:

Lexmark CX522ade, Lexmark CX522de; Lexmark CX622ade, Lexmark CX622de; Lexmark CX625ade,

Lexmark CX625adhe, Lexmark CX625de; Lexmark MC2425adw; Lexmark MC2535adw; Lexmark

MC2640adwe; Lexmark XC2235; Lexmark XC4240, Lexmark XC4240i

Machine type:

7529

Models:

081, 230, 238, 436, 486, 496, 636, 638, 686, 698, 836, 838, 898

Edition notice

February 2021

The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local

law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of

express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made

to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the

products or the programs described may be made at any time.

References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to

make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is

not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally

equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be

used instead. Evaluation and veriﬁcation of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services,

except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.

For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.

For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.

GOVERNMENT END USERS

The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is deﬁned in 48

C.F.R. 2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are

used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R.

227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software

Notices 276

Documentation are licensed to the U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only

those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.

Trademarks

Lexmark and the Lexmark logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc. in the

United States and/or other countries.

Gmail, Android, Google Play, and Google Chrome are trademarks of Google LLC.

Macintosh, Safari, and AirPrint are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App

Store and iCloud are service marks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Use of the Works

with Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to work speciﬁcally with the technology

identiﬁed in the badge and has been certiﬁed by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

The Mopria® word mark is a registered and/or unregistered trademark of Mopria Alliance, Inc. in the United

States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.

PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s

designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer

is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used

in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.

PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Wi-Fi® and Wi-Fi Direct® are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Licensing notices

All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the CD:\NOTICES directory of the

installation software CD.

Noise emission levels

The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO

9296.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

1-meter average sound pressure, dBA

Printing 53 (one-sided); 55 (two-sided)

Scanning 53

Copying 56

Ready 16

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Notices 277

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive

The WEEE logo signiﬁes speciﬁc recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the

European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.

If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your

local sales oce phone number.

India E-Waste notice

This product including components, consumables, parts and spares complies with the “India E-Waste Rules”

and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated

diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1% by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the

exemption set in the Rule.

Product disposal

Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local

authorities for disposal and recycling options.

EU battery directive

This product may contain a coin‑cell lithium rechargeable battery. This product is in compliance with EU

Directive 2006/66/EC as amended by Directive 2008/12/EC, 2008/103/EC, and 2013/56/EU.

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling

The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program allows you to return used cartridges for free to Lexmark for reuse

or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or

demanufactured for recycling. The boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.

Notices 278

To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, do the following:

1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.

2Select the product that you want to recycle.

Static sensitivity notice

This symbol identiﬁes static-sensitive parts. Do not touch the areas near these symbols without ﬁrst touching

a metal surface in an area away from the symbol.

To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge when performing maintenance tasks such as clearing paper

jams or replacing supplies, touch any exposed metal frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior

areas of the printer even if the symbol is not present.

ENERGY STAR

Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR® emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certiﬁed to

comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as of the date of manufacture.

Temperature information

Operating temperature and relative humidity 10 to 32.2°C (50 to 90°F) and 15 to 80% RH

15.3 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F) and 8 to 80% RH

Maximum wet bulb temperature2: 22.8°C (73°F)

Non-condensing environment

Printer / cartridge / imaging unit long-

term storage1

Printer / cartridge / imaging unit short-term

shipping

-40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)

1 Supplies shelf life is approximately 2 years. This is based on storage in a standard oce environment at 22°C (72°F)

and 45% humidity.

2 Wet-bulb temperature is determined by the air temperature and the relative humidity.

Notices 279

Laser notice

The printer is certiﬁed in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for

Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certiﬁed as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements

of IEC 60825-1: 2014.

Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there

is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance,

or prescribed service conditions. The printer has a non-serviceable printhead assembly that contains a laser

with the following speciﬁcations:

Class: IIIb (3b) AlGaInP

Nominal output power (milliwatts): 15

Wavelength (nanometers): 650–670

Power consumption

Product power consumption

The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)

Printing The product is generating hard‑copy

output from electronic inputs.

One-sided: 400 (CX421, MC2325, MC2425); 530 (CX522,

MC2535, XC2235); 580 (CX622, MC2640); 580 (CX625,

XC4240)

Two-sided: 280 (CX421, MC2325, MC2425); 360 (CX522,

MC2535, XC2235); 420 (CX622, MC2640); 420 (CX625,

XC4240)

Copy The product is generating hard‑copy

output from hard‑copy original

documents.

425 (CX421, MC2325, MC2425); 485 (CX522, MC2535,

XC2235); 560 (CX622, MC2640); 540 (CX625, XC4240)

Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy

documents.

25 (CX421, MC2325, MC2425); 28.5 (CX522, MC2535,

XC2235); 29.5 (CX622, MC2640); 28 (CX625, XC4240)

Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 25 (CX421, MC2325, MC2425); 26.5 (CX522, MC2535,

XC2235); 28.5 (CX622, MC2640); 29.5 (CX625, XC4240)

Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level

energy‑saving mode.

2.2 (CX421, MC2325, MC2425); 1.9 (CX522, MC2535,

XC2235); 1.8 (CX622, MC2640); 1.8 (CX625, XC4240)

Hibernate The product is in a low‑level

energy‑saving mode.

0.2 (CX421, MC2325, MC2425); 0.2 (CX522, MC2535,

XC2235); 0.2 (CX622, MC2640); 0.2 (CX625, XC4240)

O The product is plugged into an electrical

outlet, but the power switch is turned

o.

0.2 (CX421, MC2325, MC2425); 0.2 (CX522, MC2535,

XC2235); 0.2 (CX622, MC2640); 0.2 (CX625, XC4240)

The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements.

Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.

Notices 280

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Sleep Mode

This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by

lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged

after this product is not used for a speciﬁed period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.

Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 15

By using the conﬁguration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modiﬁed between 1 minute and 120 minutes.

If the print speed is less than or equal to 30 pages per minute, then you can set the timeout only up to 60

minutes. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the

response time of the product. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but

uses more energy.

Hibernate Mode

This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in

Hibernate Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.

The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:

•Using the Hibernate Timeout

•Using the Schedule Power modes

Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days

The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modiﬁed

between one hour and one month.

Notes on EPEAT-registered imaging equipment products:

•Standby power level occurs in Hibernate or O mode.

•The product shall automatically power down to a standby power level of ≤ 1 W. The auto standby function

(Hibernate or O) shall be enabled at product shipment.

O mode

If this product has an o mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product

power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.

Total energy usage

It is sometimes helpful to estimate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are

provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends

in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's

energy usage.

Notices 281

Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment

This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain the analog facsimile card:

Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model Number:

LEX-M14-002 or LEX-M03-002

Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative

Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other

information, a product identiﬁer in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided

to your telephone company.

This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.

A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply

with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. Use a compliant telephone cord

(RJ-11) that is 26 AWG or larger when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network. See

your setup documentation for more information.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to

a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an

incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed ﬁve (5.0). To be certain of the number

of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone

company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identiﬁer

that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point

(for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that

temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company

will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to ﬁle a complaint with the

FCC.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could

aect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in

order for you to make necessary modiﬁcations to maintain uninterrupted service.

If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International,

Inc. at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone

network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.

This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark

International, Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.

Connection to party line service is subject to state taris. Contact the state public utility commission, public

service commission, or corporation commission for information.

If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of

this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm

equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualiﬁed installer.

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other

electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a

margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the ﬁrst page of the transmission, the date and time

it is sent and an identiﬁcation of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the

Notices 282

telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number

provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance

transmission charges.)

See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.

Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network

This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical

speciﬁcations.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) indicates the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to

a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only

to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed ﬁve. The REN is located on the product

label.

This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.

Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada

Ce produit est conforme aux spéciﬁcations techniques d’Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique

Canada.

Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number : numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) indique le nombre maximum

d'appareils pouvant être connectés à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui

peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas

dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN est indiqué sur l'étiquette produit.

Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.

Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network

The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item

of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions

for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any

sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another

item of telepermitted equipment of a dierent make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible

with all of Telecom's network services.

This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom “111” Emergency Service.

This equipment may not provide for the eective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same

line.

This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom

customers.

This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for

which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should diculties arise in such circumstances.

The decadic (or pulse) dialing on this device is unsuitable for use on the Telecom network in New Zealand.

For correct operation, the total of all the Ringer Equivalence Numbers (RENs) of all parallel devices connected

to the same telephone line may not exceed 5. The REN of this device is located on the label.

Notices 283

This device uses an RJ-11C modular connector. Contact your point of purchase if a BT adapter is required. The

Lexmark part number is 80D1873.

Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the

equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following

limits for compliance to Telecom's speciﬁcations:

•There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single

manual call initiation, and

•The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt

and the beginning of the next call attempt.

•The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to dierent numbers are spaced such that there

is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.

Japanese telecom notice

The installed optional modem is in compliance with Japanese Telecommunication Law and has been Certiﬁed

by JATE, with the following Certiﬁcation Number:

A18-0046001 or A11-0160001

Lexmark International, Inc.

LEX-M14-002 or LEX-M03-002

A18-0046001 or A11-0160001

Using this product in Switzerland

This product requires a Swiss billing tone ﬁlter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which

receives metering pulses in Switzerland.

Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse

Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un ﬁltre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark :

80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse.

Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz

Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark

Teilenummer 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen

werden.

Notices 284

Uso del prodotto in Svizzera

Questo prodotto richiede un ﬁltro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee

che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera.

Regulatory notices for wireless products

This section contains regulatory information that applies only to wireless models.

If in doubt as to whether your model is a wireless model, go to http://support.lexmark.com.

Modular component notice

Wireless models contain one of the following modular components:

Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model Number LEX-M07-001; FCC ID:IYLLEXM07001; IC:2376A-LEXM07001

Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model Number LEX-M08-001; FCC ID:IYLLEXM08001; IC:2376A-LEXM08001

To determine which modular components are installed in your particular product, refer to the labeling on your

actual product.

Exposure to radio frequency radiation

The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other

regulatory agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and

any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.

Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada

This device complies with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS

standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the

device.

Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique Canada

Cet appareil est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence d'Innovation, Sciences et Développement

économique Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit

pas causer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toutes les interférences, y compris les celles qui peuvent

entraîner un fonctionnement indésirable.

European Community (EC) directives conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directive 2014/53/EU on the

approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to radio equipment.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,

40550 USA. The EEA/EU authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8

Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. The EEA/EU Importer is: Lexmark

Notices 285

International Technology S.à.r.l. 20, Route de Pré-Bois, ICC Building, Bloc A, CH-1215 Genève, Switzerland. A

declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized

Representative or may be obtained at

www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/european-union-declaration-of-conformity.html.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking:

EU and other countries statement of radio transmitter operational frequency bands and

maximum RF power

This radio product transmits in the 2.4GHz (2.412–2.472GHz) band in the EU. The maximum transmitter EIRP

power output, including antenna gain, is ≤ 20dBm.

United Kingdom (UK) conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the Radio Equipment Regulations 2017.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,

40550 USA. The UK Importer is: Lexmark International Ltd, Highﬁeld House, Foundation Park - 8 Roxborough

Way, Maidenhead Berkshire - SL6 3UD, United Kingdom. A declaration of conformity is available upon request

from the UK Importer or may be obtained at

www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/uk-declaration-of-conformity.html.

Compliance is indicated by the UKCA marking:

UK statement of radio transmitter operational frequency bands and maximum RF power

This radio product transmits in the 2.4GHz (2.412–2.472GHz) band in the UK. The maximum transmitter EIRP

power output, including antenna gain, is ≤ 20dBm.

Multiple model information

The following information applies to all CX421 (7529-230), CX522 (7529-436), MC2325 (7529-081), MC2425

(7529-238), MC2535 (7529-486), and XC2235 (7529-496) printer models.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information

statement

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part

15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful

Notices 286

interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the

equipment is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a

particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which

can be determined by turning the equipment o and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference

by one or more of the following measures:

•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

•Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

•Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dierent from that to which the receiver is connected.

•Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.

The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than

recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modiﬁcations to this equipment. Unauthorized changes

or modiﬁcations could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing

device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach

or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a

violation of FCC regulations.

Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:

Director of Lexmark Technology & Services

Lexmark International, Inc.

740 West New Circle Road

Lexington, KY 40550

Telephone: (859) 232–2000

E-mail: regulatory@lexmark.com

Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada compliance

statement

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment

Standard ICES-003.

Avis de conformité aux normes de l’Innovation, Sciences et

Développement économique Canada

Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux

équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.

Notices 287

日本の VCCI 規定

製品にこのマークが表示されている場合、次の要件を満たしています。

この装置は、クラス B 情報技術装置です。この装置は、家庭環境で使用することを目的としていますが、この

装置がラジオやテレビジョン受信機に近接して使用されると、受信障害を引き起こすことがあります。

取扱説明書に従って正しい取り扱いをしてください。

VCCI-B

European Community (EC) directives conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2014/30/EU, 2014/35/EU,

2009/125/EC, and 2011/65/EU as amended by (EU) 2015/863 on the approximation and harmonization of the

laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed

for use within certain voltage limits, the ecodesign of energy-related products, and on the restrictions of use of

certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,

40550 USA. The EEA/EU authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8

Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. The EEA/EU Importer is: Lexmark

International Technology S.à.r.l. 20, Route de Pré-Bois, ICC Building, Bloc A, CH-1215 Genève, Switzerland. A

declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized

Representative or may be obtained at

www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/european-union-declaration-of-conformity.html.

This product satisﬁes the Class B limits of EN 55032 and safety requirements of EN 62368-1.

United Kingdom (UK) conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations

2016, the Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016, the Ecodesign for Energy-Related Products and

Energy Information (Amendment) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019, and the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous

Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment Regulations 2012.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,

40550 USA. The UK Importer is: Lexmark International Ltd, Highﬁeld House, Foundation Park - 8 Roxborough

Way, Maidenhead Berkshire - SL6 3UD, United Kingdom. A declaration of conformity is available upon request

from the UK Importer or may be obtained at

www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/uk-declaration-of-conformity.html.

This product satisﬁes the Class B limits of BS EN 55032 and safety requirements of BS EN 62368-1.

Model‑speciﬁc information

The following information applies only to the CX622 (7529-636, 7529-638), CX625 (7529-836, 7529-838),

MC2640 (7529-686), and XC4240 (7529-898) printer models.

Notices 288

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information

statement

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part

15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the

equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful

interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than

recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modiﬁcations to this equipment. Unauthorized changes

or modiﬁcations could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing

device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach

or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a

violation of FCC regulations.

Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:

Director of Lexmark Technology & Services

Lexmark International, Inc.

740 West New Circle Road

Lexington, KY 40550

Telephone: (859) 232–2000

E-mail: regulatory@lexmark.com

Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada compliance

statement

This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment

Standard ICES-003.

Avis de conformité aux normes de l’Innovation, Sciences et

Développement économique Canada

Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux

équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.

Notice to users of Class A products in Brazil

Este produto não é apropriado para uso em ambientes domésticos, pois poderá causar interferências

eletromagnéticas que obrigam o usuário a tomar medidas necessárias para minimizar estas interferências.

Notices 289

European Community (EC) directives conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2014/30/EU, 2014/35/EU,

and 2011/65/EU as amended by (EU) 2015/863 on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the

Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within

certain voltage limits, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic

equipment.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,

40550 USA. The EEA/EU authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8

Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. The EEA/EU Importer is: Lexmark

International Technology S.à.r.l. 20, Route de Pré-Bois, ICC Building, Bloc A, CH-1215 Genève, Switzerland. A

declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized

Representative or may be obtained at

www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/european-union-declaration-of-conformity.html.

This product satisﬁes the Class A limits of EN 55032 and safety requirements of EN 62368-1.

United Kingdom (UK) conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations

2016, the Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016, and the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous

Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment Regulations 2012.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,

40550 USA. The UK Importer is: Lexmark International Ltd, Highﬁeld House, Foundation Park - 8 Roxborough

Way, Maidenhead Berkshire - SL6 3UD, United Kingdom. A declaration of conformity is available upon request

from the UK Importer or may be obtained at

www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/uk-declaration-of-conformity.html.

This product satisﬁes the Class A limits of BS EN 55032 and safety requirements of BS EN 62368-1.

Radio interference notice

Warning

This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN 55032 Class A limits and immunity

requirements of EN 55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.

This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case

the user may be required to take adequate measures.

STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,

LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER

PRINTERS

Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY

This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the

country-speciﬁc warranty information that came with your product.

Notices 290

This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale,

from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”

Limited warranty

Lexmark warrants that this product:

—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts

—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship

If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for

repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).

If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the

product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or

option with the product.

If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to

that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this

statement to that user.

Limited warranty service

The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12

months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with

the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser

Units, Transfer/Transport Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is

available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance”

message for such item.

To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to

deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark

designated location. You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the

Lexmark designated location.

When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of

the Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.

The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.

Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a

repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal

obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.

As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the ﬁrmware in your printer to the

latest version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized

products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized

use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted.

Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable

storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).

For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area

contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web.

Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer

covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.

Notices 291

Extent of limited warranty

Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of

prints produced by any product.

Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:

—Modiﬁcation or unauthorized attachments

—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance

—Unsuitable physical or operating environment

—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer

—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle

—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark speciﬁcations

—Refurbishment, repair, reﬁlling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts

—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark

TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS

OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND

SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW

ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL

APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT

TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.

Limitation of liability

Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance

or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover

actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.

Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the

product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or

damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL

LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER

ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the

possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.

This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's

and its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers

are intended beneﬁciaries of this limitation.

Additional rights

Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or

limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not

apply to you.

This limited warranty gives you speciﬁc legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

Notices 292

Index

accessing the controller

board 262

activating Voice Guidance 29

adapter plug 68

adding contacts 27

adding groups 28

adding hardware options

print driver 273

adding internal options

print driver 273

adding printers to a

computer 272

adjusting

ADF registration 261

scanner registration 260

adjusting fax darkness 72

adjusting speech rate

Voice Guidance 29

adjusting the brightness

display 195

adjusting the default headphone

volume 167

adjusting the default speaker

volume 167

adjusting toner darkness 246

AirPrint

using 42

analog fax

cannot receive faxes 252

setting up 63

answering machine

setting up 65

applications, supported 22

assigning printer to a ring

pattern 70

attaching cables 14

automatic document feeder

(ADF)

using 48, 51, 61, 74

avoiding paper jams 196

blocking junk faxes 73

bookmarks

creating 26

creating folders for 27

cannot connect printer to

Wi‑Fi 238

cannot open Embedded Web

Server 237

cannot receive faxes using

analog fax 252

cannot scan to a network

folder 256

cannot send e‑mails 249

cannot send or receive faxes

using analog fax 250

cannot send or receive faxes

using etherFAX 253

cannot send the fax cover page

from the computer 255

Card Copy

setting up 22

card stock

loading 33

changing fax resolution 72

changing the printer port settings

after installing ISP 172

changing the wallpaper 23

checking the printer

connectivity 239

checking the status of parts and

supplies 176

cleaning

exterior of the printer 172

interior of the printer 172

scanner 173

cleaning the printer 172

cleaning the scanner 162

cleaning the touch screen 175

clearances around the printer 11

clearing jam

in the multipurpose feeder 208

in trays 198

Cloud Connector proﬁle

creating 26

printing from 47

scanning to 78

collated printing does not

work 243

collating copies

copying 49

Color Correction

manual 246

Color Correction Content 246

computer

connecting to the printer 171

computer, scanning to 74

conﬁdential print jobs 45

conﬁguring daylight saving

time 70

conﬁguring fax speaker

settings 167

conﬁguring supply

notiﬁcations 166

conﬁguring the e‑mail server

settings 51

conﬁguring Universal paper 31

conﬁguring Wi‑Fi Direct 170

connecting a computer to the

printer 171

connecting mobile device

to printer 170

connecting printer to distinctive

ring service 70

connecting the printer

to a wireless network 168

connecting to a wireless network

using PIN method 169

using Push Button method 169

conserving supplies 195

contacting customer support 261

contacts

adding 27

deleting 28

editing 28

control panel

Lexmark CX522 18

Lexmark CX622 18

Lexmark MC2535 18

Lexmark MC2640 18

Lexmark XC2235 18

controller board

accessing 262

copy troubleshooting

partial copies of documents or

photos 257

poor copy quality 258

scanner does not respond 260

Index 293

copying

both sides of the paper 49

creating a shortcut 50

using the ADF 48

using the automatic document

feeder (ADF) 48

using the scanner glass 48

copying multiple pages 50

copying multiple pages onto a

single sheet 50

copying on letterhead 49

copying photos 48

creating a Cloud Connector

proﬁle 26

creating a copy shortcut 50

creating a fax destination

shortcut 71

creating a shortcut

copy 50

e‑mail 60

fax destination 71

FTP address 76

creating an e‑mail shortcut 60

creating an FTP shortcut 76

creating bookmarks 26

creating folders

for bookmarks 27

creating shortcuts 23

Customer Support

using 25

customer support

contacting 261

customizing the display 23

date and time

fax settings 70

daylight saving time

conﬁguring 70

deactivating the Wi‑Fi

network 171

default headphone volume

adjusting 167

default speaker volume

adjusting 167

Defective ﬂash detected 240

deleting contacts 28

deleting groups 28

Device Quotas

setting up 24

directory list

printing 47

display brightness

adjusting 195

Display Customization

using 23

distinctive ring service, fax

enabling 70

documents, printing

from a computer 42

from a mobile device 42

Eco‑Mode

setting 194

Eco‑Settings

conﬁguring 25

editing contacts 28

editing groups 28

emission notices 277, 285, 288

enabling Magniﬁcation mode 29

enabling personal identiﬁcation

numbers 30

enabling spoken passwords 30

enabling the USB port 236

enabling Wi‑Fi Direct 170

encrypting

printer hard disk 164

enlarging a copy 49

envelope seals when

printing 242

envelopes

loading 33, 34

environmental settings 194

erasing memory

from the printer hard disk 164

erasing printer hard disk

memory 164

erasing printer memory 163, 164

etherFAX, using

setting up fax function 64

Ethernet cable 14

Ethernet port 14

exporting a conﬁguration ﬁle

using the Embedded Web

Server 274

e‑mail

creating a shortcut 60

sending 59

e‑mail alerts

setting up 166

e‑mail function

setting up 51

e‑mail server

conﬁguring 51

e‑mail service providers 51

e‑mail troubleshooting

cannot send e‑mails 249

e‑mailing

using the automatic document

feeder (ADF) 51

using the scanner glass 51

factory default settings

restoring 164

FAQ about color printing 247

fax

forwarding 73

holding 73

sending 70

fax darkness

adjusting 72

fax destination

creating a shortcut 71

fax driver

installing 272

fax log

printing 72

fax resolution

changing 72

fax server, using

setting up the fax function 65

fax setup

country‑ or region‑speciﬁc 68

standard telephone line

connection 65

fax speaker settings

conﬁguring 167

fax troubleshooting

caller ID is not shown 250

cannot receive faxes using

analog fax 252

cannot send faxes using analog

fax 252

cannot send or receive faxes

using analog fax 250

cannot send or receive faxes

using etherFAX 253

cannot send the fax cover page

from the computer 255

cannot set up etherFAX 253

missing information on the fax

cover page 254

poor fax print quality 254

Index 294

faxing

setting the date and time 70

using the automatic document

feeder (ADF) 61

using the scanner glass 61

FCC notices 285

ﬁnding information about the

printer 10

ﬁnding the printer serial

number 15

ﬁrmware, updating 274

ﬂash drive

printing from 43

scanning to 77

font sample list

printing 47

forwarding fax 73

FTP address

creating a shortcut 76

FTP server, scanning to

using the control panel 75

fuser maintenance kit

ordering 180

groups

adding 28

deleting 28

editing 28

hardware options

memory card 265

trays 271

hardware options, adding

print driver 273

held jobs 45

Hibernate mode

setting 194

holding faxes 73

home screen

customizing 22

showing icons 22

home screen icons

using 21

HTTP/FTP Settings menu 150

humidity around the printer 279

icons on the home screen

showing 22

imaging kit

ordering 180

replacing 186

importing a conﬁguration ﬁle

using the Embedded Web

Server 274

indicator light

understanding the status 19

installing a memory card 265

installing an optional card 266

installing options

printer hard disk 268

installing the fax driver 272

installing the print driver 272

installing the printer

software 272

installing trays 271

internal option is not

detected 239

internal options

ﬁrmware card 262

memory card 262

printer hard disk 262

internal options, adding

print driver 273

jammed pages are not

reprinted 246

jams

avoiding 196

locating jam areas 197

locations 197

jams, clearing

in the automatic document

feeder 204

in the duplex unit 198

in the fuser 198

in the manual feeder 209

junk faxes

blocking 73

keyboard on the display

using 30

letterhead

copying on 49

loading 33, 34

Lexmark Mobile Print

using 42

Lexmark ScanBack Utility

using 74

LINE port 14

linking trays 36

loading the manual feeder 34

loading the multipurpose

feeder 33

loading trays 31

locating the security slot 163

Magniﬁcation mode

enabling 29

making a copy 48

managing screen saver 23

manual color correction

applying 246

manual feeder

loading 34

memory card

installing 265

802.1x 149

About this Printer 95

Accessibility 88

Anonymous Data Collection 88

Conﬁdential Print Setup 158

Conﬁguration Menu 89

Copy Defaults 106

Custom Scan Sizes 105

Device 161

Eco‑Mode 82

Erase Temporary Data Files 159

Ethernet 144

E‑mail Defaults 124

E‑mail Setup 123

Fax 161

Fax Mode 110

Fax Server Setup 120

Fax Setup 110

Flash Drive Print 139

Flash Drive Scan 135

FTP Defaults 130

Help 162

HTML 103

HTTP/FTP Settings 150

Image 103

IPSec 148

Job Accounting 99

Layout 95

Index 295

Local Accounts 154

LPD Conﬁguration 149

Manage Permissions 153

Media Types 106

Menu Settings Page 160

Miscellaneous 160

Network 162

Network Overview 140

Notiﬁcations 83

Out of Service Erase 94

PCL 101

PDF 100

PostScript 101

Power Management 87

Preferences 80

Print 161

Quality 97

Remote Operator Panel 83

Restore Factory Defaults 89

Restrict external network

access 151

Security Audit Log 155

Setup 96

Shortcuts 161

SNMP 147

Solutions LDAP Settings 160

TCP/IP 145

ThinPrint 150

Tray Conﬁguration 104

Troubleshooting 162

Universal Setup 105

USB 151

Visible Home Screen Icons 94

Web Link Setup 130

Wireless 141

Wi‑Fi Direct 144

XPS 100

Menu Settings Page

printing 162

menus

Disk Encryption 159

Schedule USB Devices 155

missing information on the fax

cover page 254

mobile device

connecting to printer 170

printing from 42, 43

Mopria Print Service 42

moving the printer 193

multipurpose feeder

loading 33

navigating the screen

using gestures 29

navigating the screen using

gestures 29

network folder

scanning to 76

noise emission levels 277

Non‑Lexmark supply 241

non‑volatile memory 164

erasing 163

Not enough free space in ﬂash

memory for resources 240

notices 277, 278, 280, 281, 285,

286, 288

optional card

installing 266

ordering

fuser maintenance kit 180

ordering a black and color

imaging kit 180

ordering a black imaging kit 180

ordering a waste toner

bottle 180

ordering supplies

imaging kit 180

toner cartridge 176

waste toner bottle 180

paper jam clearing

standard bin 204

paper jam in door A 198

paper jam in the automatic

document feeder 204

paper jam in the multipurpose

feeder 208

paper jam in the standard

bin 204

paper jam in trays 198

paper jam, clearing

in the automatic document

feeder 204

paper jams

avoiding 196

paper jams, clearing

in the duplex unit 198

in the fuser 198

in the manual feeder 209

parts status

checking 176

personal identiﬁcation number

method 169

personal identiﬁcation numbers

enabling 30

photos

copying 48

placing separator sheets

between copies 50

poor fax print quality 254

power button light

understanding the status 19

power cord socket 14

power saver modes

setting 194

print driver

hardware options, adding 273

installing 272

print jobs not printed 230

print quality

cleaning the scanner 173

print quality troubleshooting

blank pages 211

crooked print 220

dark print 212

ghost images on prints 213

gray or colored

background 215

horizontal dark lines 224

horizontal white lines 227

light print 216

missing colors 218

mottled print and dots 219

paper curl 243

print appears tinted 248

repeating defects 229

skewed print 220

solid color or black images 221

text or images cut o 221

toner easily rubs o 222

uneven print density 223

vertical colored lines or

banding 225

vertical white lines 228

white pages 211

print troubleshooting

collated printing does not

work 243

conﬁdential and other held

documents do not print 234

Index 296

envelope seals when

printing 242

incorrect margins 215

jammed pages are not

reprinted 246

job prints from the wrong

tray 233

job prints on the wrong

paper 233

paper frequently jams 245

print jobs do not print 230

slow printing 231

tray linking does not work 244

unable to read ﬂash drive 236

printer

fully conﬁgured 12

shipping 194

printer conﬁgurations 12

printer connectivity

checking 239

printer hard disk

encrypting 164

installing 268

printer hard disk memory 164

erasing 164

printer information

ﬁnding 10

printer is not responding 235

printer location

selecting 11

printer memory

erasing 163

printer menus 79

printer messages

Defective ﬂash detected 240

Non‑Lexmark supply 241

Not enough free space in ﬂash

memory for resources 240

Replace cartridge, printer region

mismatch 241

Scanner maintenance required,

use ADF Kit 242

Unformatted ﬂash detected 241

printer options troubleshooting

cannot detect internal

option 239

printer port settings

changing 172

printer ports 14

printer reports

viewing 166

printer settings

restoring factory default 164

printer software

installing 272

printer status 19

printing

conﬁdential print jobs 45

directory list 47

fax log 72

font sample list 47

from a computer 42

from a ﬂash drive 43

from a mobile device 42, 43

from Cloud Connector

proﬁle 47

held jobs 45

Menu Settings Page 162

quality test pages 162

repeat print jobs 45

reserve print jobs 45

using Mopria Print Service 42

using Wi‑Fi Direct 43

verify print jobs 45

printing from a computer 42

printing from a ﬂash drive 43

Push Button method 169

QR codes

adding 25

recycling

Lexmark packaging 195

Lexmark products 195

reducing a copy 49

removing paper jam

in the multipurpose feeder 208

in trays 198

repeat print jobs 45

repeating defects 229

Replace cartridge, printer region

mismatch 241

replacing supplies

black and color imaging kit 186

black imaging kit 186

toner cartridge 180

waste toner bottle 182

resetting

supply usage counters 241

resetting the supply usage

counters 241

restoring factory default

settings 164

RJ‑11 adapter 68

running a slideshow 23

safety information 8, 9

saving paper 50

Scan Center

setting up 24

scan troubleshooting

cannot scan from a

computer 255

cannot scan to network

folder 256

partial copies of documents or

photos 257

poor copy quality 258

scan job was not

successful 258

scanner does not respond 260

scanning freezes the

computer 259

scanning takes too long 259

scanner

cleaning 173

scanner does not close 259

scanner glass

using 48, 51, 61, 74

Scanner maintenance required,

use ADF Kit 242

scanning

to a Cloud Connector proﬁle 78

to a computer 74

to a network folder 76

to an FTP server 75

to e‑mail 59

using the automatic document

feeder (ADF) 74

using the scanner glass 74

scanning to a ﬂash drive 77

scanning to an FTP server

using the control panel 75

scheduling a fax 71

securing printer memory 164

security slot

locating 163

selecting a location for the

printer 11

Index 297

sending a fax

scheduled 71

sending e‑mail 59

sending fax 70

separator sheets between

copies

placing 50

serial number, printer

ﬁnding 15

setting the paper size 31

setting the paper type 31

setting up

analog fax 63

setting up Device Quotas 24

setting up e‑mail alerts 166

setting up fax

country‑ or region‑speciﬁc 68

standard telephone line

connection 65

setting up fax function using

etherFAX 64

setting up the fax function using

fax server 65

shipping the printer 194

shortcut

Copy 23

Email 23

Fax 23

FTP 23

shortcuts

creating 23

showing icons on the home

screen 22

Sleep mode

setting 194

slow printing 231

SMTP settings

conﬁguring 51

speaker

default volume 167

spoken passwords

enabling 30

statement of volatility 164

storing print jobs 45

supplies

conserving 195

supplies status

checking 176

supply notiﬁcations

conﬁguring 166

supply usage counters

resetting 241

supported applications 22

supported fax 62

supported ﬁle types 44

supported ﬂash drives 44

supported paper sizes 37

supported paper types 39

supported paper weights 40

temperature around the

printer 11, 279

toner cartridge

ordering 176

replacing 180

toner darkness

adjusting 246

touch screen

cleaning 175

trays

installing 271

linking 36

loading 31

unlinking 36

troubleshooting

cannot connect printer to

Wi‑Fi 238

cannot open Embedded Web

Server 237

FAQ about color printing 247

printer is not responding 235

troubleshooting, copy

partial copies of documents or

photos 257

poor copy quality 258

scanner does not close 259

scanner does not respond 260

troubleshooting, e‑mail

cannot send e‑mails 249

troubleshooting, fax

caller ID is not shown 250

cannot send faxes using analog

fax 252

cannot send or receive faxes

using analog fax 250

cannot send or receive faxes

using etherFAX 253

cannot send the fax cover page

from the computer 255

cannot set up etherFAX 253

missing information on the fax

cover page 254

troubleshooting, print

collated printing does not

work 243

conﬁdential and other held

documents do not print 234

envelope seals when

printing 242

incorrect margins 215

jammed pages are not

reprinted 246

job prints from the wrong

tray 233

job prints on the wrong

paper 233

paper frequently jams 245

print jobs do not print 230

slow printing 231

tray linking does not work 244

troubleshooting, print quality

blank pages 211

crooked print 220

dark print 212

ghost images on prints 213

gray or colored

background 215

horizontal dark lines 224

horizontal white lines 227

light print 216

missing colors 218

mottled print and dots 219

paper curl 243

print appears tinted 248

repeating defects 229

skewed print 220

solid color or black images 221

text or images cut o 221

toner easily rubs o 222

uneven print density 223

vertical colored lines or

banding 225

vertical white lines 228

white pages 211

troubleshooting, printer options

cannot detect internal

option 239

troubleshooting, scan

cannot scan from a

computer 255

cannot scan to a network

folder 256

partial copies of documents or

photos 257

Index 298

poor copy quality 258

scan job was not

successful 258

scanner does not close 259

scanner does not respond 260

two‑sided copying 49

unable to read ﬂash drive

troubleshooting, print 236

Unformatted ﬂash detected 241

Universal paper

conﬁguring 31

unlinking trays 36

updating ﬁrmware 274

USB cable 14

USB port 14

enabling 236

using

genuine Lexmark parts 176

genuine Lexmark supplies 176

using Customer Support 25

using Display Customization 23

using QR Code Generator 25

using the automatic document

feeder (ADF) 48, 51, 61, 74

using the control panel

Lexmark CX421 17

Lexmark CX625 19

Lexmark MC2325 17

Lexmark MC2425 17

Lexmark XC4240 19

using the home screen 21

using the scanner

glass 48, 51, 61, 74

verify print jobs 45

viewing reports 166

virtual keyboard

using 30

Voice Guidance

activating 29

speech rate 29

Voice Guidance speech rate

adjusting 29

volatile memory 164

erasing 163

waste toner bottle

replacing 182

wireless network

connecting the printer to 168

Wi‑Fi Protected Setup 169

wireless networking 168

Wi‑Fi Direct

conﬁguring 170

enabling 170

printing from a mobile

device 43

Wi‑Fi network

deactivating 171

Wi‑Fi Protected Setup

wireless network 169

Index 299

Table of Contents

Lexmark CX522ade User Manual

Related Manuals